BC 5380 Service Manual

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
Copyright
2008 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2008-12 (Version: 1.0).
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)

owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability
arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual
in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and

other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial
purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
I
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
z Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,
the following procedure should be followed:
1. Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on
the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the
Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number,
and a brief description of the reason for return;
2. Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);
3. Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer
Service department.
III
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,

Address:
Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
IV
Table of Contents
1 Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2
1.3 How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5
2 System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4 Main Structure ....................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5 Software structure ............................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.1 Menu structure ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.2 Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-31
3 Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1

3.1 Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3 Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3
3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit........................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3 Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9
3.4 Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10
3.5 Connections......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6 Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-27
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-27
3.7 Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-35
3.8 Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-41
3.9 Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-42
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-47
3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-53
4 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Piercing needle......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1
1
Table of Contents
4.1.3 Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.4 Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.5 Valves ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.6 Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.7 Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.8 Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5
4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-6
4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures ...................................................... 4-8
4.3.2 DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-18
4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-18
5 Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26
5.1.4 Removal ................................................................................................. 5-28
5.1.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-30
5.2 Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-32
5.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-49
5.3 Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-59
5.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-78
5.4 Autoloader board ................................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.2 Board Composition................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-109
5.4.4 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-110
5.4.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-112
5.5 Power board ...................................................................................................... 5-117
5.5.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-117
5.5.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-117
5.5.4 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-124
5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-129
5.6.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-129
2
Table of Contents
5.7 Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140

5.7.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140
5.7.2 Board composition................................................................................ 5-140
5.7.3 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-143
5.8 Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-148
5.8.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-148
5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-151
5.9 Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-154
5.9.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-154
5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-158
5.10 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-160
5.10.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-160
5.11 Key Board .......................................................................................................... 5-163
5.11.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-163
6 Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings ....................................... 6-1
6.2 General .................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-4
6.3.2 Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-6
6.3.4 Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-7
6.3.5 Removing the front door........................................................................... 6-8
6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-9
6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes........................................................ 6-11
6.4.1 Replacing valves .................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-15
6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-17
6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-18
6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-24
6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-26
6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-29
6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-29
6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-31
6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-33
6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-37
6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)................................................................... 6-39
6.8.1 Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample compartment assembly
6-39
6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the sample transport unit
3
Table of Contents
6-45
6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit....................................................... 6-46
6.9 Mix mechanism.................................................................................................... 6-58
6.10 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 6-66
6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position........................................................... 6-66
6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position ..................................................................... 6-73
7 Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1
7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-3
7.2.1 Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.3 Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-7
7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-7
7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-8
7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly.................................................................. 7-10
7.3 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.1 Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-12
7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-18
7.3.3 Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19
7.3.4 Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-24
7.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-27
7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation ............................................................................... 7-27
7.4.2 Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-27
7.4.3 Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-28
8 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Error code and information .................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-9
8.2.1 Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.2 Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3 Hardware errors ..................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.4 Measurement errors............................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5 Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.6 Scattergram errors ................................................................................. 8-13
9 Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1

A. Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1
B. List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1
C. Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1
E. Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1
F. Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable ....... F-1
4
1 Using This Manual
1.1 Introduction
The chapter explains how to use the BC-5380 service manual. This manual provides the
reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5380. Before servicing the
BC-5380, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and
for your safety.
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operators manual of BC-5380.It does not
contain information and procedures already covered in the operators manual of BC-5380.
z Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operators manual.
1-1
Using This Manual
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual
To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:

A thorough understanding of
Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices
Reagent systems
Quality control
Troubleshooting concepts
The ability to
Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology
Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope
Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology
Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
1-2
Using This Manual
1.3 How to Find Information
This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find
the information you need.
If you want to See

learn about the system structure and the basic Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of the BC-5380
learn about the installation requirements and how to Chapter 3 System Installation and
upgrade the BC-5380 software Software Upgrade
learn about the fluidic system of the BC-5380 Chapter 4 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system of the BC-5380 Chapter 5 Hardware System
learn about how to maintain the BC-5380 Chapter 6 Maintenance
learn about the optical system of the BC-5380 Chapter 7 Optical System
learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
of the BC-5380
learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5380 Appendix A Accessories
learn about the main wearing parts of the BC-5380 Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
system of the BC-5380
learn about the function of each valve and pump of Appendix D Pump and Valve Function
the BC-5380 Table
learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5380 Appendix E Tubing
learn about how to identify cross network cable and Appendix F Method to Identify Cross
direct-connected network cable Network Cable and Direct-Connected
Network Cable
1-3
Using This Manual
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:
all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (on the external keyboard), such as
[ENTER].
bold letters included in indicate text you can find on the screen, such as Clean.
bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.
All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
your analyzer setup or data displayed.
1-4
Using This Manual
1.5 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual:
When you see Then

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.
alerting you to information that requires your attention.

alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see It means
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
1-5
Using This Manual
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
BATCH CODE
USE BY
SERIAL NUMBER
CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)
USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONTROLS)
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
IRRITATING SUBSTANCE
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE

WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER
STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS
1-6
Using This Manual
SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS

PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED
AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING
THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF
CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT
BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE
CONSEQUENCES TO THE
ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION
WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND
RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE
CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM
WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT.
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.
1-7
Using This Manual
z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
z Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
z Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached

to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.
z Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
z To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and
piercer.
z Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
z Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

according to government regulations.
z The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
z If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
1-8
Using This Manual
z Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.
z For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

customer service department for maintenance advice.
z To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
z Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
z Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
z All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.
z Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
z The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-9
2 System Structure
2.1 Introduction
Hardware
Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays
information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser
control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board,
indicator board, liquid-level detecting board, key board and autoloader control board.
Interface
The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer,
which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the
interfaces of the external computer.
Software operating environment
The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main
unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is
operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software
analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints
the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions
including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.
Fluidic System
The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.
The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the
software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.
2-1
System Structure
2.2 Fluidic System

Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual
2-2
System Structure
2.3 Hardware System

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual
2-3
System Structure
2.4 Main Structure

The BC-5380 auto hematology analyzer consists of the main unit (analyzer) and the
accessories.
Figure 2-1 Front of the analyzer
1---Front cover 2---Power/Status indicator

3---[OPEN] key 4---[RUN] key
5---Tube 6---Tube rack
7---Tube 8---Adapter
9---Sample compartment door
2-4
System Structure
Figure 2-2 Back of the analyzer
1 --- Network interface 2 --- M-53D diluent sensor connector

3 --- M-53D diluent inlet 4 --- M-53 cleanser inlet
5 --- M-53LH lyse inlet 6 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet
7 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet 8 --- AC input
9 --- Waste outlet 10 --- Waste sensor connector
2-5
System Structure
Figure 2-3 Left side of the analyzer
1--- Door lock 2---Power switch
2-6
System Structure
Figure 2-4 Right side of the analyzer
1---Door lock 2---Tube

3---Tube rack
2-7
System Structure
Figure 2-5 Front of the analyzer (front cover removed)

1 --- Sampling module 2 --- Tube
3 --- Tube rack 4 --- Sample transport assembly
5 --- Sample compartment assembly 6 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly
7--- Sample injection syringe assembly 8 --- Sampling syringe assembly
9 --- Fluidic valve 10 --- Relieve valve assembly
2-8
System Structure
Figure 2-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door removed)
1 --- Front cover assembly 2 --- Diluent syringe assembly

3 --- Lyse syringe assembly 4 --- Pressure chamber assembly
5 --- Air pumps 6 --- Left door
7 --- liquid level detection unit 8 --- Valve assembly (2)
9 --- Valve assembly (1) 10 --- Power switch
11 --- Drive board 12 --- Data board
13 --- Mother board 14 --- Top cover
2-9
System Structure
Figure 2-7 Right side of the analyzer (right door removed)
1 --- Optical system 2 --- Isolation chamber

3 --- Sampling assembly 4 --- Fluidic valves
5 --- Fluidic valves 6 --- Volumetric unit
7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly 8 --- Right door
9 --- Waste pump assembly 10 --- Valve assembly (3)
11 --- Bath assembly 12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly
13 --- Pinch valve 14 --- Autoloader control board
15 ---Mix mechanism
2-10
System Structure
2.5 Software structure

The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner
the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the
external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the
parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count,
QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.
2.5.1 Menu structure

1. Shortcut button area
When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the
screen containing 10 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the
corresponding operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure 2-8.
Any screen Run
STAT
Diluent
Worklist
Graph
Table
QC
Logout
Shutdown
Exit
Figure 2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area

2. Run message box
The menu structure of the Run message box is shown in Figure 2-9.
2-11
System Structure
RUN AL-WB Start
Ok
Cancel
CT-WB Start
Ok
Cancel
CT-PD Start
Ok
Cancel
Figure 2-9 Menu structure of the Run message box

3. Worklist screen
At the Worklist screen, you can click the function buttons to perform the corresponding
worklist-related operations.
The menu structure of the Worklist screen is shown in Figure 2-10.
2-12
System Structure
Figure 2-10 Menu structure of the worklist screen

4. Review screen
The Review menu has five submenus: Graph, Table, Data Backup, Data Export and
Compare. The Data Backup and Data Export functions can be enabled only when the analyzer
has just been started up or you are at the Table review screen; otherwise, they grey out. The
Table review includes the functions of auto-backup and auto-restore, which will be performed
automatically by the software when the condition of backup or restoring is fulfilled. The menu
structures of each screen of the Review screen are shown below.
Graph
The menu structure of the graph review screen is shown in Figure 2-11.
2-13
System Structure
Figure 2-11 Menu structure of the graph review screen

Table
The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure 2-12.
Samples
TABLE Sample List Delete
within Today
Deselect
All Samples Print

Trend Graph
Samples CV
Found
Result Optical
Edit Result
Restore Result
Sample/ Store
Patient Info.
Validate
Batch Validate
Microscopic Search
Exam. and
Transmit
Others
Pos./Total
Others Data Backup

Data Export
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
Figure 2-12 Menu structure of the table review screen

Data Export
The menu structure of the Data Export screen is shown in Figure 2-13.
2-14
System Structure
Figure 2-13 Menu structure of the data export screen

Data Backup
The menu structure of the Data Backup screen is shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Menu structure of the data backup screen

Compare
The menu structure of the Compare screen is shown in Figure 2-15.
2-15
System Structure
Comparison
COMPARE Re-fill
Summary
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print
Result Trend Re-fill
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print
Figure 2-15 Menu structure of the compare screen

5. QC screen
The QC programs include the L-J QC, X-B QC, X QC and X -R QC. Click the shortcut
button QC of the guidance bar on the left of the screen to enter the L-J QC graph screen.
Click Menu QC, then the submenus of four QC programs will pop up for you to select.
L-J
The menu structure of the L-J QC program is shown in Figure 2-16.
2-16
System Structure
Figure 2-16 Menu structure of the L-J QC program
2-17
System Structure
X-B
The menu structure of the X-B QC program is shown in Figure 2-17.
X-B Settings Set Limits
Have Preset
Values
Restore
Defaults
Save
Print
Graph Delete
Calculate
Preset Values
Save Preset
Values
Print
Pos./Total
List Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total
Figure 2-17 Menu structure of the X-B QC program
The menu structure of the X QC program is shown in Figure 2-18.
2-18
System Structure
Figure 2-18 Menu structure of the X QC program
2-19
System Structure
X -R
The menu structure of the X -R QC program is shown in Figure 2-19.
X -R Settings Save
Print
Run Start
Print
Pos./Total
Graph Delete
New Vial
Data Compare
Display order
Outliers
Print
Pos./Total
Table Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total
Figure 2-19 Menu structure of the X -R QC program
6. Service screen
The Service screen contains screens of Maintenance, Status, Self-test, Debug,
Log, Counter and Version and Config. Information. The menu structures of these
2-20
System Structure
screens are shown below.
Maintenance screen
The menu structure of the Maintenance screen is shown in Figure 2-20.
2-21
System Structure
Figure 2-20 Menu structure of the Maintenance screen
2-22
System Structure
Status screen
The menu structure of the Status screen is shown in Figure 2-21.
Status Temperature&Pressure Export
Print
Voltage&Current Export
Print
Sensor Export
Print
Signal Collection Export
Print
Figure 2-21 Menu structure of the Status screen
Self-test screen
The menu structure of the Self-test screen is shown in Figure 2-22.
2-23
System Structure
Figure 2-22 Menu structure of the Self-test screen
2-24
System Structure
Debug screen
The menu structure of the Debug screen is shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Menu structure of the Debug screen
Counter screen
The menu structure of the Counter screen is shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Menu structure of the Counter screen
Log screen
The menu structure of the Log screen is shown in Figure 2-25
2-25
System Structure
Figure 2-25 Menu structure of the Log screen

Version and Config. Information screen
The menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen is shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen
2-26
System Structure
7. Setup screen
The Setup screen contains screens of Gain, Data Format, Reagent, Auxiliary, Para.
Unit, Ref. Range, Print, Auto Maintenance, User and Password and Advanced.
The menu structure of the Setup screen is shown in Figure 2-27.
2-27
System Structure
SETUP Date Format
Reagent
Auxiliary
Para. Unit
Apply
Ref. Range
Print
Ok
Communication
RUO
Cancel
Gain
Auto Maintenance
Autoloader
Barcode Info.
Lab Info. Ok
Cancel
Advanced Maintenance
User and
Password New
Edit
Delete
Reset Password
Change Password
Close
Figure 2-27 Menu structure of the Setup screen
8. Statistics screen
2-28
System Structure
The menu structure of the Statistics screen is shown in Figure 2-28.

Calculate Statistical
STATISTICS Re-fill
Workload Condition
Statistical
Statistics
Item
Workload
Summary Adjust Order
Print
Calculate Statistical
Re-fill
Charge Condition
Statistics
Charge
Summary Adjust Order
Print
Figure 2-28 Menu structure of the Statistics screen
9. Shortcut Code screen

The menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen is shown in Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 Menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen
10. Calibration screen

The menu structure of the Calibration screen is shown in Figure 2-30.
2-29
System Structure
Figure 2-30 Menu structure of the Calibration screen
11. Help info.

The menu structure of the Help screen is shown in Figure 2-31.
HELP Contents Service
Review
Search
Daily
Operations
Print
Setup
Calibration
QC
Figure 2-31 Menu structure of the Help screen
12. Shutdown
The menu structure of Shutdown is shown in Figure 2-32.
2-30
System Structure
SHUTDOWN Sleep
Shutdown
Figure 2-32 Menu structure of Shutdown
13. Exit
The menu structure of Exit is shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Menu structure of EXIT
2.5.2 Passwords
The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator (set by the user at
the User and Password screen) and service engineer (user name: service, and password:
Se s700. Note: there is a space between e and s). An administrator is enabled to have all
the authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is enabled to have all the authorities
of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for each level of user.
Table 2-1 Authorities enabled for the common user level

Level Module Screen Authorities enabled
Common Worklist Worklist Users of three levels are enabled with all
User the authorities of the worklist screen, which
including: New, Save, Insert,
Delete, Search, Hide,
Select(Deselect), Browse, Copy and
Print.
2-31
System Structure
Count All screens Users of three levels are all enabled with
except the QC the authority of running samples.
Run and
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug); as
well as the
Run screen
Review Graph Data/Graph, Saving of DIFF, Print,
Pos./Total, Lock, Data Browse (the buttons
of Validate, Edit Result and Restore
Result are available, but when you click
them, a message box will pop up for
authority identification.)
Saving of the Microscopic Exam. and
Others screen, Print, Pos./Total, Lock,
Data Browsing and Setup of blood ESR ref.
range.
TABLE Save, Print, Communication, Deselect,
Search, Trend Graph (cannot be printed),
CV (cannot be printed), arrow buttons
above the Pos./Total control (the buttons
of Validate, Batch Validate, Edit
Result and Restore Result are
available, but when you click them, a
message box will pop up for authority
identification.)
Data Export Data Export
Data Backup Data Backup
Compare Search and re-fill patient information,
adjust and print parameters in the
comparison summary, adjust and print
parameters in the result trend.
Auto-backup Auto-backup
Auto-restore Auto-restore
2-32
System Structure
QC L-J L-J QC setup: browse file information of

different lot No.(but can not edit the QC
settings), Print
L-J QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup, Data Export, History and
Pos./Total
X-B X-B QC setup: browse the information of
the screen but no edit allowed, Print
X-B QC graph: Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Print and Pos./Total
X-B QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Pos./Total
X X QC setup: browse file information of

settings), Print
X QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
X QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
X QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Pos./Total
2-33
System Structure
X -R X -R QC setup: browse file information of

settings), Print
X -R QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
X -R QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
X -R QC table: Print, Communication,
Data Backup, Data Export, History and
Pos./Total
Service Maintenance Replace Reagent (All Reagents
unavailable), Clean, (Empty WBC Bath,
Empty RBC Bath, Empty DIFF Bath
all unavailable), Maintain the whole device
Status Temperature&Pressure ( Analyzer
Information unavailable at the Print
message box), Voltage&Current
(Analyzer Information unavailable at the
Print and Export message boxes)
Self-test Self-test for syringes and sampling
mechanism, valves and others
Counter Check and print all the information
Log Check, print and see details of logs
including Set Paras, Other Logs and
All Logs
Version and Check, export and print the information of
Config. the Version and Config. Information
Information screen
Setup General Date Format, Reagent, Auxiliary
Format (Authority unavailable)
1. Check the information of the User list
screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset
User and password are disabled.
Password 2. When log in as a common user, the
password of the current login user can be
modified.
2-34
System Structure
Lab Check the Lab information, but not allowed

Information to edit
Statistics Select statistical items, set statistical

Calculate
conditions, adjust and print workload
Workload
summaries
Calculate Set calculate conditions, adjust and print

Charge charge summaries
Shortcut Code Department Check

Deliverer Check
Diagnosis Check
Gender Check
Calibration Calibration
Browse and print user calibration factors
Factor
Help Help Check the help information
Shutdown Perform the Sleep and Shutdown
Shutdown
procedures
Exit Exit Log out and exit the system
Table 2-2 Authorities enabled for the administrator level

Administrator Worklist Worklist
Run All screens
except the QC
Run ,
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug) and
Calibration
Review Graph Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit
Result and Restore Result
Table Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and
Delete
Data Export
2-35
System Structure
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC L-J L-J QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set
limits, get preset values
L-J QC count
L-J QC graph: Delete
L-J QC table: Delete
X-B X-B QC setup: Edit QC files, get preset
values, restore defaults, save
X-B QC graph: Delete
X-B QC table: Delete
X X QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set

limits, get preset values
X QC count
X QC graph: Delete
X QC table: Delete
X -R X -R QC setup: edit QC files, save
X -R QC count
X -R QC graph: Delete
X -R QC table: Delete
Service Maintenance
Status Temperature&Pressure (Analyzer
Information available at the Print
(Analyzer Information available at the
Print message box)
Self-test
Counter
Log Check, print and see the details of the
Error Info.
Version and
Config.
Information
2-36
System Structure
Setup Authority setting items of the Auxiliary

screen
Check and set the parameters of screens
General Setup
including Para. Unit, Ref. Range, Print,
Communication, RUO, Auto Maintenance,
Autoloader and Barcode Info.
New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords
User and
of all users and change the administrators
Password
own password
Lab
Check and edit the Lab Information
Information
Shortcut Code New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code
Statistics Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge
Shortcut Code Department New, Edit and Delete
Deliverer New, Edit and Delete
Diagnosis New, Edit and Delete
Gender New, Edit and Delete
Calibration Calibration Save and restore the User Calibration
Factors Factors (all the User Calibration Factors)
1. Calibration in the CT-CBC+DIFF mode
Calibrator 2. Calibrate one or more parameters
among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
1. Fresh Blood calibration in the CT-WB

and CT-PD Mode;
Fresh Blood
2. Calibrate one or more parameters
among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
Help Help
Shutdown Shutdown
Exit Exit
Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for the service engineer level

Service Worklist Worklist
2-37
System Structure
Engineer Run All screens

except the QC
Run ,
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug) and
Calibration
Review Graph Special Info.
Table Trend graph (can be printed), CV (can be
printed), Optical
Data Export
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC L-J
X-B
X -R
Service Maintenance 1. Replace All Reagents
2. Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and
Empty DIFF Bath at the Maintenance
screen
Status Temperature&Pressure (Analyzer
Information available at the Export
(Analyzer Information available at the
Export message box), Sensor, Signal
collection and Export the Analyzer
Information
Self-test
Counter Initialize the number of times that each
item has been calculated except
the Sample Count Times (samples in
QC, calibration, background counts and
reliability tests not included)
2-38
System Structure
Log Export, Save, Print and see Details of Set

Paras, Other Logs, All Logs, Error
Info. and RunSequence
Debug Debug
Version and
Config.
Information
Setup Edit FS, SS and SF values of the Gain
screen; set the value for Auto prompt
General Setup
when n samples were run at the Auto
Maintenance screen
User and
Password
Lab
Information
Shortcut Code
Advanced Maintain
Statistics Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge
Shortcut Code Department
Deliverer
Diagnosis
Gender
Calibration Import and Export User Calibration Factors
and Factory Calibration Factors, Restore
Calibration
Defaults, Save, Restore (All the Factory
Factors
Calibration Factors and Factory Transfer
Factors), Print
1. Factory calibrator calibration in the

WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and
PD-CBC+DIFF mode.
Calibrator
2. Calibrate one or more parameters
among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and
MPV.
Help Help
2-39
System Structure
Shutdown Shutdown
Exit Exit
2-40
3 Instrument Installation and Software
Upgrade
3.1 Preparations
3.1.1 Purpose
Install the instrument and update the software properly as per the procedures introduced in this
chapter.
3.1.2 Tools
Blade or clipper
USB flash drive
Pipette (200l)
Cross-headed screwdriver
Thermometer with a probe
z The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the
analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.
3.1.3 Accessories
Plastic test tube
Glass Pipette
7m standard particles
Gloves
Tissues
Controls (high and normal level)
z Do prepare the 7m standard particles firstly to proceed with the later

confirmation work of the optical gain.
3-1
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.2 Installation Requirements

3.2.1 Space Requirements
Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the analyzer
itself, arrange for:
at least 100 cm on both left and right sides;
at least 50 cm behind;
enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the diluent, rinse and waste
containers
3.2.2 Power Requirements

1. Make sure the analyzer is properly grounded. Before turning on the analyzer, make sure
the input voltage meets the requirements.
2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be
unreliable. Please place the analyzer near the electrical outlet to avoid using the
plug-board.
3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the analyzer. Using other electrical wire
may damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results.
Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V
Input power: 300 VA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
3.2.3 Environment Requirements

The installation environment of analyzer must meet the following requirements:
1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 - 30
2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 %
3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa
4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud
noises, pollution and electrical interference.
5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this
analyzer. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use
this analyzer in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.
6. Do not place the analyzer near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and
electrical contacts that regularly open and close.
7. Do not place the analyzer on a slope.
8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the analyzer in direct sunlight
or in front of a source of heat or drafts.
3-2
z Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements.

Otherwise, the performance of the analyzer might be affected.
3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements

1. Startup the computer, then right-click My Computer and select Properties to enter the
property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the
computer here. They should meet the following requirements:
Operation system Windows 2000 Professional + SP4, Windows XP Home/XP
Professional + SP2 or Windows Vista.
RAM256MB at least
Figure 3-1 Checking Properties of My computer
3-3
Operating
system
RAM
Figure 3-2 System properties

2. Right-click the desktop and select Properties, and then click the Settings tag to enter
the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should
meet the following requirements:
Resolution1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure 3-4)
Figure 3-3 Checking Properties of desktop
3-4
Screen resolution
Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution

3. Double-click My Computer to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the
space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements:
Hard disk space4GB available on one disk at least.
Disk space
Figure 3-5 My computer

Then, close these 3 dialog boxes.
3-5
z The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the

foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.
z If the operating system on the external PC is Windows 2000 Professional

+SP4, the software for the analyzer can only be installed successfully after
installing the Windows2000-KB835732 patch of the corresponding language.
z To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, you should copy the

installation files from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a
CD-ROM, and then copy the files to the PC for installation through U drive.
To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, install or update the software
using the CD directly. To connect to the LIS, the PC should be configured
with two network cards.
3-6
3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking
3.3.1 Checks before unpacking

Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.
3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit

1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before
unpacking.
Figure 3-6 External package of main unit

2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box
shown in the figure below.
Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover

3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.
3-7
Figure3-8 Remove accessory box

4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.
Figure3-9 Remove carton

5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a
countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.
Figure 3-10 Lift main unit
3-8
z When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible and avoid strong
impact.
3.3.3 Checking packing list

Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.
3-9
3.4 Removal and Installation

1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the
sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11
shows.
Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp
2. When using the tubes of 1475mmor 1575mmmodel, you should disassembly

the adapter from the rack to load the tubes. Disassembly as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Remove the adapter from the tube rack

3. To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, the installation files should be copied
from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a CD-ROM, and then plug the
flash drive to the USB interface of the PC for installation and open the folder with
3-10
installation files. To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, put the installation CD
directly into the CD-ROM.and open the folder with instaltion files. Copy the installation files
from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB interface and then open the
installation folder.
4. Check if there is any software of other hematology analyzer on the PC. If there is, uninstall
the software or database before installation, and then double-click Setup.exe to install
the software. Select the language from the pull-down list in the pop-up message box, and
then click OK to continue installing, as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Language selecting

5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto
Hematology Analyzer. You can click Browse to change the directory if necessary. Then,
click Next to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14 Selecting directory
6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being
installed.
3-11
Figure 3-15 Progress bar

7. When the installation of the software is finished, a message box shown in Figure 3-16 will
pop up. Click Next to install the necessary components and database.
Figure 3-16 Continuing installing

8. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-17 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept to continue installing.
3-12
Figure 3-17 Installing .NET Framework 2.0

9. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-18 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept button to continue installing.
3-13
Figure 3-18 Installing Windows Installer 3.1

10. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-19 will pop up while installing, please click
the Accept to continue installing.
3-14
Figure 3-19 Installing SQL

11. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-20 will pop up while installing, please click
the Install button to continue installing.
Figure 3-20 Installing VC++ R L

12. A progress bar Installing XXX shown in Figure 3-21 will pop up while installing the
components. Please be patient and wait as it may take longer time.
3-15

13. After part of the components is installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-22 may pop up.
You should click Yes to restart the computer and the installation program may continue
automatically after restarting.
Figure 3-22 Restarting the PC

14. When finish installing the components, the database will be installed automatically as
shown in Figure 3-23 .
Figure 3-23 Installing database
3-16
15. When the installation is complete, a message box shown in Figure 3-24 will pop up. Click
Close to close the box and the entire software installation procedure is finished.
Figure 3-24 Installation complete
z If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you
should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in
3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.
16. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC.
17. The BC-5380 consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only basic interactive
keys like the [RUN] and [OPEN] keys are located on the main unit. The rest of the
operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one
connecting the BC-5380 and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g.
LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons
of Local Area Connection for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to
configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC:
(1) Right click My Network Places and select Properties from the pop-up dialog box.
3-17
Figure 3-25 Right clicking Network neighbor

(2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select Properties. In the pop-up message
box, select the check box of Show icon in notification area when connected and Notify
me when this connection has limited or no connectivity, and then click OK. Repeat this
procedure to set the other network interface.
Figure 3-26 Connection properties

(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
and then click Properties. At the pop-up screen, select Use the following IP address, and
then enter 10.0.0.1 into the IP address box and 255.0.0.0 into the Subnet mask box, as
shown in Figure 3-27 .
3-18
Figure 3-27 Setting IP address

(4) Then, click OK to save all the settings.
z Never set the Default gateway and DNS server for the network interface
(10.0.0.1) connecting the BC-5380. Otherwise, you may not access to the
network connecting the other network interface.
z If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the

other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the
IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the BC-5380) is not applied to other computers
or computers in the other network.
18. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows
to check and set the IP for the LIS computer.
(1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click My Network Places and select
Properties from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-28 .
3-19
Figure 3-28 Network Neighbor (LIS computer)

(2) Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties, as shown in Figure
3-29 .
Figure 3-29 Connection properties

Then, the following box will pop up:
3-20
Figure 3-30 Connection properties (LIS computer)

(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, double click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to enter the following screen.
3-21
Figure 3-31 Setting IP address

(4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP
information on the BC-5380.
(5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway
and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically.
Then, click OK to save the settings.
z The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.
3-22
3.5 Connections
1. See Figure 3-32 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the
M-53LEO(I) lyse, M-53LEO(II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a
plane of the same level, and the M-53D diluent, M-53 cleanser, and waste containers
should be placed under the countertop.
Figure 3-32 Connections of reagent and waste containers
z Make sure the M-53LEO (I) lyse, M-53LEO (II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and M-53
cleanser are placed on the same level as the analyzer.
Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated.

See Figure 3-33 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube
connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.
3-23
Figure 3-33 linking wires and lines
2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the
power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a
power outlet.
Figure 3-34 Connection of PC and power supply
3. Connect the BC-5380 with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-35 .
3-24
Figure 3-35 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer
z Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the IPU computer and the
LIS computer.
z The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug
them to IPU computer and the LIS computer respectively at will. Please see
appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a
direct-connected network cable.
4. There are two ways to connect the BC-5380 and the LIS computer.
(1) Connect the BC-5380 with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-36 .
Figure 3-36 Connecting the IPU computer and the LIS computer
z Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS
computer.
z The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the
two computers respectively.
(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-37 .
3-25
Figure 3-37 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN
z Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU

computer to the LAN.
z The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged

into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router,
etc.) respectively.
Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the
hospital or doctors requirement.
5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power
cord properly.
3-26
3.6 Start-up
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup

Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure
3-38. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.
Marks on relieve valve
Figure 3-38 Marks on relieve valve

1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are
not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling
assembly), as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Sampling and probe wipe tubing
2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure
the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged, as Figure 3-40 shows.
3-27
Check and make sure

the tubes connecting
the V25, V26 and the
tee-connector of the
volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged
Figure 3-40 Tubing free from bending and clogging

3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as
Figure 3-41 shows.
Check and make

sure the thick 50
tube connecting
the V27 is not
bended and
clogged
Figure 3-41 Tubing free from bending and clogging

4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are
in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-42 .
3-28
Two-way
connector Tube 1
Tee connector
Figure 3-42 Checking the pinch valve
3.6.2 Start up for the first time
1. Turn on the analyzer, wait a moment and then a prompt will appear
on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the
BC-5380 already. Similarly, if the other prompt appears on the

task bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesnt connect the
BC-5380, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all
then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the

BC-5380 from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then,
plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface.
2. Double click the BC-5380 Hematology Analyzer icon on the desktop of the IPU
computer to start up the software. Then, enter the user name service and the password
Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the login box, as shown in
Figure 3-43 , and then click OK to initialize the analyzer.
3-29
Figure 3-43 Logging in

3. During the initialization, a dialog box Skip fluidic initialization? will pop up. Click No to
continue the initialization.
Figure 3-44 Skip fluidic initialization?

4. When initialization is finished, click Menu Setup Communication to enter the
screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click Ok to save the
settings.
3-30
Figure 3-45 Communication setup
z The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer
connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the
interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server
cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.
5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is
working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting.
6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the LIS
icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-46, indicating you can start
transmitting data now.
3-31
Figure 3-46 LIS communication
z The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU

software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU
software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect
after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the
connection will be established and ready for communication.
z The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable;
connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or
exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices
like routers.
3.6.3 Inspection after Startup

1. Click Menu Service Version and Config. Information, as shown in Figure 3-47 to
enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-48.
3-32
Figure 3-47 Menu option
Figure 3-48 Version and config. Info.

2. Check and make sure the following items are the correct and specified version: Boot
Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board MCU,
Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure 3-48, and
then close the message box.
3-33
z The specified version here means the PC end software should be complied
with that of the main unit end. Upgrade the main unit end software to match
the PC end software if necessary.
3-34
3.7 Setup and Adjustment
3.7.1 Setting Parameters

1. At the main screen, click MenuSetupReagent to enter the reagent screen where
you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-49.
Figure 3-49 Clicking Reagent

2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: Diluent, LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II)
Lyse, LH Lyse and Cleanser.
3-35
Figure 3-50 Setting the expiration date
3. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in

Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-51 Entering Advance screen
3-36
Figure 3-52 Advance screen

4. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen, as shown in Figure 3-52, and the
Ambient Temp. Calibration screen will pop up. Put the thermometer to about 5cm from
the right side of the analyzer (do not touch the analyzer). Read the measured value after 1
minute and enter it in the blank box at the screen. Click Calculate New Difference to get
the new deviation, and then click Ok to go back to the Advanced screen, as shown in
Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Ambient Temp. Calibration screen

5. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen to go to the Ambient Temp.
Calibration screen;
6. Read the measured temperature after 1 minute and make sure the deviation of the value
measured by the analyzer from that by the thermometer should be less than 1. If not,
readjust the ambient temperature until the deviation is less than 1.
7. Input the ambient temperature measured by the analyzer and the thermometer, and then
3-37
click Ok at the Ambient Temp. Calibration screen to go to the Advanced screen.

Click Ok to close the Advanced screen.
3.7.2 Adjusting Position

1. Press the [RUN] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once.
2. At the graph review screen, click the Special info. button as shown in Figure 3-54 to
enter the special information screen shown in Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-54 Clicking Special info.
Figure 3-55 Special info. Screen
3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the
background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-55.
3-38
Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board.
Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the RBC Start signal delay is
within [4, 5.5]. If they are found out of the limit, fine adjust the distance between the tee
connector under the volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board
according to the WBC and RBC Start signal delay, as shown in Figure 3-56. When WBC
start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube downwards; When
WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube upwards;
When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric tube
downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 5.5s, stop adjusting the RBC
volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit,
do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values
are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile,
check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special
info. message box.
z Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly.
Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector
may leak and the volumetric tube may be broken.
Figure 3-56 Distance under the volumetric tube
4. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in

Figure 3-58.
3-39
Figure 3-57 Entering Advance screen
Figure 3-58 Advance screen
5. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously
complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-58. Enter the
recorded mean time if the time displayed doesnt comply with the recorded one.
3-40
3.8 Testing Other Functions

Click MenuSetupPrint to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between
the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-59.
Select printer
Click OK
Figure 3-59 Print Setup
3-41
3.9 Confirming Gain
3.9.1 HGB blank voltage

After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary.
1. Entering the setup screen
At the main screen, click Menu SetupGain to enter the screen.
HGB gain
HGB blank
voltage
Figure 3-60 Setup screen

2. Confirming the HGB gain
You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall
be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust:
At the Gain screen, click the adjusting button of the HGB current value to set the HGB
blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.
3.9.2 Gain of Optical System

After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust:
1. At the Graph screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF and then perform the
background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified
3-42
requirement.
2. At the Table review screen, select the background record run previously, and then click
Optical to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-62 .
SS 0.1max total
FS 0.1max total
Click Calculate
Click OK

3. Click Calculate, and then make sure the calculated FS and SS 0.1max total (the larger
3-43
number) is less than 50. Otherwise, you should clean the flow cell and DIFF bath at the
Maintenance screen. Then, repeat steps 1 to 3 until the number of FS and SS 0.1max
particles are less than 50. Then, click Ok to back to the main screen, as shown in Figure
3-62.
4. Run the calibrator on the analyzer. Select the test results from the Graph review screen,
and click Optical to go to the Optical screen. Click Calculate, and then check if the
gravity center position of FS and SS meet the following requirements (choose the one
have more particles within the FS 0.1max range): the FS gravity center should locate
within 0.57 of the low angle target peak; the SS gravity center should locate within 0.63
of the high angle target peak
5. If the position of FS and SS gravity centers do not meet the requirements, input the FS and
SS gain target values of the corresponding particle at the Optical screen, and then get
the gain values, as shown in Figure 3-63
Figure 3-63 Optical screen

6. Click Ok to close the Optical screen, and then click Menu SetupGain. Confirm
the values in the FS and SS boxes are the same with the FS and SS gain values. If not,
input the recorded FS and SS gain values as current FS and SS values, and then click
Ok to exit the screen, as shown in Figure 3-64
3-44
Figure 3-64 Setting optical gains

7. At the Graph review screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF. Then, prepare
the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into
1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.
z Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample.
Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.
8. When finish running, enter the Table screen and select the standard particle sample just
run, and then click the Optical button, as shown in Figure 3-65.
3-45
Figure 3-65 Table review screen

9. At the Optical screen, click the Calculate button. Check if the following requirements
are met: FS gravity center within (16.68, 19.42); SS gravity center within (100.56, 107.92);
SS 0.1max width 15.21, and then click OK to exit the optical screen.
10. If the gravity center and the 0.1max width of the standard particle do not meet the
requirements, fine tune the FS and SS gain values at the Gain screen. Run the calibrator
and the 7um standard particles, until the following requirements are met: for the calibrator,
the gravity center of the low angle should be within 1.51; the gravity center of the high
angle should be within 2.4 from the target values; for the 7um standard particles, the
gravity center of low angle should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); gravity center of high
angle should be 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angle width 6.50, high angle width of
7um standard particles 15.21. If these requirements are met, name and save the values.
3-46
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test
3.10.1 Background Count

Back to the Graph screen and perform the background count in WB-CBC+DIFF mode. The
background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:0.1109/L, RBC:0.031012/L,
HGB:1g/L, HCT:0.5%, PLT:5109/L.
3.10.2 Carryover
Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operators Manual to make sure the
carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:
Parameter Carryover
WBC 0.5
RBC 0.5
HGB 0.6
HCT 0.5
PLT 1.0
3.10.3 Reproducibility
In the AL-WB-CBC+DIFF mode, AL-WB-CBC mode, CT-PD-CBC+DIFF mode and
CT-PD-CBC mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the requirements
specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operators Manual
The CV requirements for whole blood mode:
Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)

WBC (6.015.0)109/L 2.0%
12
RBC (4.006.00)10 /L 1.5%
HGB (110180)g/L 1.5%
MCV (80110)fL 1.0%
9
PLT (150500)10 /L 4.0%
The CV requirements for predilute mode:
Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)

9
WBC (6.015.0)10 /L 4.0%
RBC (4.006.00)1012/L 3.0%
HGB (110180)g/L 3.0%
MCV (80110)fL 2.0%
PLT (150500)109/L 8.0%
3-47
3.10.4 Calibration
1. Click MenuCalibration, and then click Calibrator to enter the screen. Select the
calibration mode as Whole Blood; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the
calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into
the table.
Figure 3-66 Calibration (WB)

2. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample
compartment and put the calibrator into the compartment. Close the compartment door
manually, and then press the [RUN] key, as Figure 3-67 shows. When you hear the beep,
the analyzer is starting to run automatically.
3-48
Figure 3-67 Calibrator sampling
z Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (1 ml at
least).
3. Repeat running the calibrator for 11 times as instructed by Step 2.Then, click the Start
button. The setup of whole blood calibration factors is completed. Click Diluent and a
message box will pop up. Put the tube into the tube holder and put the loaded tube holder
into the sample compartment, and then close the compartment door manually. Then press
the [RUN] key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-68 shows. Dispense the diluent
into the tube for 6 times consecutively. Then click the Cancel button to close the
message box. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment and take out the
tube and the tube holder.
3-49
Click
Diluent
Then click
Cancel
Figure 3-68 Dispensing diluent

4. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120L and load the tip, and then aspirate the
calibrator, as Figure 3-69 shows.
Figure 3-69 Pipette

5. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator
into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-70 shows.
3-50
Figure 3-70 Mix the sample

6. Go back to the Calibrator screen, and then select the calibration mode as Predilute
and enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC,
RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into the table.
Figure 3-71 Calibration (PD)

7. Present the vial of calibrator well mixed as instructed by Step 6 into the tube holder, and
3-51
then put the loaded tube holder into the sample compartment. Close the compartment door,
and then press the [RUN] key. When you hear the beep, the analyzer is starting to run
automatically.
z Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (at least
1ml).
8. Running the calibrator consecutively for 11 times as instructed by Step 8. The setup of
predilute calibration factors is completed.
3.10.5 Linearity
See installation verification report of the BC-5380.
3-52
3.11 Software upgrade
3.11.1 Upgrading the PC installed software

We only update the IPU software provided that it has been completely installed on the PC. The
update will not change users custom configuration including settings and database. Follow the
following steps to update the software:
1. Double-click the setup. exe icon to launch the update program;
2. A window will pop up as shown in Figure 3-72;
Figure 3-72 Selecting the updating mode

3. Click Next to go to the installation screen shown in Figure 3-73;

4. When the program finishes the installation, a message box shown in Figure 3-74 will pop
up;
3-53
Figure 3-74 Prompting to update the database

5. Click the Next button to update the database, as shown in Figure 3-75;
Figure 3-75 Installing database files

6. When all the database files are installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-76 will prompt
3-54
the completion of installation.
Figure 3-76 Finishing installation
z To update the Version 1.3 BC-5100 software, select the Install mode to
install the new version in the previous folder rather than update the outdated
software.
z If the system prompts for not enough space on disk during installation,
select another disk to install and make sure the free space on that disk is at
least 4G.
3.11.2 Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer)

1. Click MenuAll ProgramsBC-5380 Auto Hematology AnalyzerAnalyzer
Upgrade to launch the update software;
z Before perform this step, make sure that the analyzer is powered on for at
least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the connection to the main unit may fail after
reboot or the update server may be uploaded again after being connected to
the main unit.
3-55
Figure 3-77 Client update software interface

For PC using Windows Vista, the IPU software or the update client may loose connection to
the main unit after reboot. Right click on the Analyzer Upgrade item and choose Run as
administrator to solve this problem, as shown in Figure 3-78;
Figure 3-78 Running the update client in Windows Vista

2. Click Analyzer Upgrade shown in Figure 3-77 and a message box will pop up. Enter the
user name service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e
and s) in the message box, as shown in Figure 3-79;
3-56
Figure 3-79 Logging in the client update software

3. Ensure proper connection between the PC (IPU software end) and the analyzer (main unit
end). If the connection fails, a message box shown in Figure 3-80 will pop up;
Figure 3-80 Connection failure message box

If the connection is proper, the update software will automatically check if the version of the
update server is suitable. If the version meets the requirement, Step 4 will be skipped;
otherwise, the update software will upload the latest update server files to the analyzer, as
shown in Figure 3-81;
Figure 3-81 Automatically uploading the update server to the analyzer

4. After the update server files have been uploaded successfully, you will be asked to restart
the main unit. Click Ok to restart, as shown in Figure 3-82;
3-57
Figure 3-82 Reboot message box
z At this time, the update program has already been disconnect from the
analyzer, so Step 1 and 2 should be performed again to launch the update
program.
z After the update server program being successfully updated and main unit
being rebooted, wait 2 minutes before logging on to the client.
5. After logging on, a message box shown in Figure 3-83 will pop up, asking you to choose
the directory of the update files;
Figure 3-83 Selecting the directory of the update files (1)

6. Click Browse in the message box shown in Figure 3-83 and select the update
package folder step1 (or other names as defined) generated by the installation CD as the
target directory, as shown in Figure 3-84;
3-58

7. Click Ok and the directory will be displayed in the box. Check if the displayed directory is
correct, as shown in Figure 3-85;

8. Click Ok to start uploading update files to the main unit, as shown in Figure 3-86;
Figure 3-86 Uploading the update files
3-59
z During uploading the update files, if the message box of Analyzer

disconnected! Can not upgrade the analyzer! pops up, check if the selected
folder is correct, and then perform the update procedures again.
9. After finishing uploading, a message box of successful uploading shown in Figure 3-87 will
pop up;
Figure 3-87 Uploading files successfully
z The uploading process takes 1 to 2 minutes according to the size of the

update files.
10. Click Ok and wait for a while. A message box will pop up to show the items to be updated,
as shown in Figure 3-88;
3-60
Figure 3-88 Items to be updated

11. Click Ok to start updating, as shown in Figure 3-89;
z During installation, if a message box of Disconnected from the analyzer.

Unable to finish updating! Please connect the analyzer and the PC end
software and try to update again. pops up, do not switch off the power
supply of the analyzer and restart the updating process from the beginning
after 5 minutes.
3-61
12. Click Ok in the message box prompting successful update, and then switch off and
restart the analyzer;
13. Update the folder step2 (including the main unit software, configuration files and fluidic
sequence) according to the same process, and then switch off the analyzer;
14. Use the screwdriver to remove the three cross-headed screws to open the top cover, and
then open the right door. Connect the J3 interface of the data board and the J11 interface
of the autoloader board using a dedicated cord, and then restart the main unit.
z Use the dedicated cord in the accessory box provided by the manufacturer.
15. Update the folder step4 (including the hardware writing software) according to the same
process, and then switch off the analyzer.
z Do not delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before updating and keep the
power supply of the main unit on. Always update the hardware after Step2 is
updated successfully.
z After replacing the data board (including rootfs, material code:

051-000014-00), remember to perform all the steps to update the software at
the main unit end.
3-62
4 Fluidic System
4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts
4.1.1 Piercing needle

Pierces the evacuated blood collection tube; aspirates and dispenses the blood sample.
4.1.2 Probe Wipe

Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe
4.1.3 Pumps
P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber.
P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum.
P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.
4.1.4 Syringes
Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 l; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates
the second diluted sample.
Diluent-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and
supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.
Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo
(I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.
Sheath-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the
flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.
Sample-Syringe: full volume 250l; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.
4.1.5 Valves
Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow
direction.
Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.
Pressure switch: monitors the pressure of the DIFF channel.
4.1.6 Baths
WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.
RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and
4-1
Fluidic System
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.

DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.
Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by
impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.
Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.
WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
4.1.7 Volumetric tube

WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample
RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample
4.1.8 Filters
Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube
Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube
P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.
4-2
Fluidic System
4.2 Fluidic System
4.2.1 Reagent volume required

Sample analysis for a single sample each time
2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode.
Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples

Volume of single analysis
Reagents Name
CBC+DIFF CBC
M-50 Diluent M-53D Diluent 45mL 34mL
M-53LEO(I) Lyse 1.1ml 0
M-53 Lyse M-53LEO(II) Lyse 0.135ml 0
M-53LH Lyse 0.5ml
Normal startup function (excluding background)

Reagents volume required:
Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally

Reagents Name Volume of normal startup
M-50 Diluent M-53D Diluent 89ml
M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0
M-53 Lyse M-53LEO(II) Lyse 0
M-53LH Lyse 2ml
Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 0
Abnormal startup function (excluding background)

Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally

Reagents Name Volume of abnormal startup
M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0
M-53LH Lyse 2ml
Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 0
Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding
startup background)
4-3
Fluidic System
Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to
Ship procedure has been done)
Volume of starting up a
drained system (after the
Reagents Name
prepare to ship procedure
has been done)
M-53LEO(I) Lyse 12ml
M-53 Lyse M-53LEO(II) Lyse 12ml
M-53LH Lyse 12ml
Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 8ml
Normal shutdown function

Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down

Reagents Name Volume of normal shutdown
M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0
M-53LH Lyse 0
Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 29ml
4-4
Fluidic System
4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing
Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)
Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)
4-5
Fluidic System
4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures
WBC Count/BASO channel
The reagents used include:

M-53LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs.
Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%
Diagrams: WBC histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:500
Metering volume: 500
Function description: 6l blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the
bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the
aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through
the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.
DIFF channel

LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations.
Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.
Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter
Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and
EOS%
Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:138
Metering volume: 127l
Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and
then 9l blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed and
reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.135ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample reacts
with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and the
sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample
syringe for measurement.
4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures
4-6
Fluidic System
RBC/PLT channel

Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: RBC and PLT
Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:20000
Metering volume: 300l
Function description: 52.08l sample dilution (1:417.7) is aspirated by the sample probe
from the WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the
sample with 2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:20000. Then, the mixed
sample is driven into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood
cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is
measured by the volumetric tube.
4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures
HGB channel

Diluent: dilutes samples and washes
LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin
Principles: Colorimetry
Parameters: HGB
Dilute ratio: 1:500
The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through
the sample with the blank reference reading.
4-7
Fluidic System
4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF

Measurement
4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures

A. Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath
20l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe from the sample tube, and then the
sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath.
The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses 9l sample.
B. First Diluting
The sample probe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses 6l sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7
dilution.
C. Cleaning the residual sample

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual
sample.
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
D. RBC second diluting

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the diluent that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000
dilution.
E. Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe returns to the home position.
4-8
Fluidic System
A B
C D
Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-9
Fluidic System
4.3.2 DIFF Channel
Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples0 - 6s
During this period:

The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and then
the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the diluent.
1. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
2. During 2.8-3.8s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse
into the DIFF bath to clean it.
3. During 4.5-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath
and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample.
4. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.
Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s)
During this period:

1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 1.1ml pre-heated
LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe.
2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 9ul sample into
the DIFF bath.
3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by
bubbling.
4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.135ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is
dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe.
5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling.
6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF
bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is energized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The
sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath.
When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown
in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.
The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s)
During this period:

1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are energized. The sheath syringe dispenses the
diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath.
2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the
flow cell at a high speed.
3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample
4-10
Fluidic System
into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow
cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable
speed for measurement.
The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation
4-11
Fluidic System
Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement
Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s)
During this period:

1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and
the sample probe are washed.
2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24
keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation
tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF
bath.
3. Cleaning the DIFF bath
a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into
the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath.
b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 1.5ml diluent.
c. Dispensing 1.5ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The
sheath syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.
4-12
Fluidic System
4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel
HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample

distribution (0-18.2s)
1. 5s HGB background test.

2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back
bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the
vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath.
4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the
WBC bath.
5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube
6. WBC sample distribution:

a. At 9.4s, valve V02, V03 are energized; and at 9s, V27is energized and the waste
pump operates. The sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the
diluent to clean the exterior of the sample probe.
b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is
energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the
WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then
descends into the WBC bath.
c. Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 l sample into the
WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.
4-13
Fluidic System
Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s)
1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile
its exterior is washed.
2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe
dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling.
The system waits for the sample becoming stable.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)
Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the
vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -300HPa and -260HPa.
Counting and bath cleaning
1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
-300 to -260 HPa, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume
that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube..
2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 41s.
3. Cleaning the front bath twice.
4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the
diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and
enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent
flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath.
Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.
Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting
4-14
Fluidic System
Fi
gure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel
Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s)
1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the
back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create
the vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and
V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping.
3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3
operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.7s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample
is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-20.5s
period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.
4-15
Fluidic System
Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube
Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s)
1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio
of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the
sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time,
and the diluent syringe dispenses a certain amount of diluent into the RBC bath and then
the sample probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the
10ml diluent syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second
dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling
for three times.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)
The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples.
Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between
-300HP and -260HP.
Counting and bath cleaning
The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10.

1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
4-16
Fluidic System
-300 to -260 HP, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent
volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.
Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting
Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath
2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the
remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the
RBC bath for soaking.
4-17
Fluidic System
3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -300HP is created in the vacuum chamber.
Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are
discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized
to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.
4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement

In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The
sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.
4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement

In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are
also changed.
Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode
A. Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath

15l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe, and then the sample probe ascends
meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3l sample into the probe
wipe.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6l sample into the WBC
bath.
B. Cleaning the sample remains

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the
residual sample..
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
C. RBC second dilution

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into
RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the diluent that is already there to form the
second dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
D. Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
4-18
Fluidic System
The sample probe returns to the home position.
A B
C D
Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-19
5 Hardware System
The BC-5380 hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts, sensors,
switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.
Heater
Heater
for optics Ambie
Sample Syringe for Diff
system nce
drive drive pool and BC-5380
And temp.
motors motors temp. Hardware System
Temp. sensor
sensors
sensors
NetPort
Fan
Sensor on right door
Vavles and Sensor on optics system

pumps Volume mesure
board and press
sensors
Laser
board Liquid level
sensor Jam drive motor
SS
Pre-amp
Mother Feed drive motor
board
Board
Auto-sample
FS Optics couple
board
Pre-amp sensor
board
Door driver
Key
Board
WBC Pole
Indication Data Board
Board
RBC Pole
Power
AC Power
Switch
Supply Drive Board HGB Module
Board
Figure 5-1 BC-5380 hardware system structure
Note:
In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the
data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes
5-1
Hardware System
represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components.

The boards of the BC-5380 and their functions are shown in the table below.
Table 5-1 Boards of the BC-5380 and their functions

No. Name Functions
1 Data board CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog
channel
2 Drive board MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving +
Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and
pressure monitoring
3 Mother board Power distribution and centralized wiring.
Plugboard supported
4 Laser control board Laser creating and controlling
5 FS pre-amplification Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle
board scattered light
6 SS pre-amplification Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle
board scattered light
7 Volumetric board Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and
WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure
sensors and amplifying the detected signals
8 Indicator board Buzzer and indicator
9 Power board Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A12V power
Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power
10 Liquid-level board Liquid-level detection of reagents
11 Autoloader board Sample transport, mix control,
electromagnetic valve control
12 Key board [RUN] key and [OPEN] key
5-2
Hardware System
5.1 Mother board
5.1.1 Introduction
The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board
input/output.
5.1.2 Board Composition

The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for
connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for
various input/output signals.
Function
Power interface
Slot for data board
Slot for drive board
Connectors for board signals (autoloader board, laser control board, pre-amp board,
volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)
Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module,
independent key, optics, etc.) signals
Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)
Block diagram
5-3
Hardware System
DB9(rs23 Socket for suck key

RJ45
2) and right door chec
ker
Socket for Indicator

rs232 int. Isolate and key board
driver transfoemer
Power filter
& indicator Socket for laser
control board
Socket for valume

mesure and press
Data borad power

Socktes for Data control board
Board
Sockets for pre-amp.
board
Sockets Socket for HGB

module
for
Power RS422 int Socket for Auto-
Supply driver sample
Sockets for Drive Sockets for

Drive boatd power vavles,pumps,motors,heat
Board ers
Sockets for
optics sensor
Socket
for Socket for
power( Autosa Socket for
Socket for fan Liq.level
mple board) Temp. sensor
checker
Figure 5-2 Function of mother board
Interface definition
List of connectors
Table 5-2 List of connectors

SN. PIN Number Function Description
PA1 96 Data board connector, digital signals
PA2 96 Data board connector, analog signals
PB1 96 Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics signals
PB2 96 Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive
5-4
Hardware System
signals
PB3 96 Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves, pumps,
and heaters
J1 8 RS-232 LAN port
J2 9 Reserved for COM port debugging
J3 10 Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU
programs of autoloader board
J4 4 RS-422 COM port, COM port of autoloader board
J5 8 Connector for the key board and indicator board
J6 6 Right door switch, and optical shielding box switch
J7 6 Laser control board connector
J8 8 Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)
J9 8 side scatter channel (SS)
J10 8 Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)
J11 5 HGB module connector
J12 8 A+/- 12V connector
J13 3 AC120V connector
J14 6 Temperature sensor connector
J15 12 Volumetric board connector
J16 34 Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers
J17 No in use
J18 24 Connector for photocouplers 1-6
J19 24 Connector photocouplers 7-12
J20 24 Connector photocouplers 13-18
J21 3 Reserved for DC mix motor
J22 8 Connector stepping motors 1-2
J26 No in use
J27 4 Connector for heater 2
J28 4 Connector for heater 1
J29 20 Connector for pumps 1-7
J30 20 Connector for valves 1-10
J34 2 Fan connector
J35 10 Connector for P12V and P24V
5-5
Hardware System
J36 6 Connector for autoloader board power

J37 4 D+5V connector
Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)

Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors.
Connector type: AMP VME female connector 3*32PIN vertical connection
Model: 5535043-4
Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board

Column A Column B Column C
1 D+5V D+5V D+5V
2 D+5V D+5V D+5V
3 D+5V D+5V D+5V
4 D+5V D+5V D+5V
5 D+5V D+5V D+5V
6 DGND DGND DGND
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 DGND DGND DGND
9 DGND DGND DGND
10 DGND DGND DGND
11 DGND DGND DGND
12 TP_TX+ PWFBOUT TP_RX+
13 TP_TX- DGND TP_RX-
14 DGND DGND DGND
15 DGND DGND DGND
16 TMS_TO_DRV TMS_TO_AS UART3_TO_PC
17 TCK_TO_DRV TCK_TO_AS UART3_TO_DAT
18 DATA_TO_DRV DATA_TO_AS DGND
19 DATA_FROM_DRV DATA_FROM_AS DGND
20 DGND UART1_TO_DAT+ UART1_TO_AS+
21 DGND UART1_TO_DAT- UART1_TO_AS-
22 UART0_TO_DRV DGND DGND
23 UART0_TO_DAT DGND DGND
24 DGND DGND #SUCK_KEY
25 DGND #VM_ON DGND
26 DGND #RBC_START #BUZ
27 DGND #RBC_STOP #COUNT_KEY
28 DGND #WBC_START FAULT
29 DGND #WBC_STOP READY
5-6
Hardware System
30 DGND DGND OPTI_DOOR

31 DGND #LASER_ON #RIGHT_DOOR
32 DGND DGND #INSERT_DOOR
Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board

Column A Column B Column C
1 AGND AGND AGND
2 AGND LASER_CURT AGND
3 AGND AGND AGND
4 AGND AGND AGND
5 AGND AGND AGND
6 AGND AGND AGND
7 AGND AGND AGND
8 AGND AGND AGND
9 AGND AGND AGND
10 AGND AGND AGND
11 AGND NC AGND
12 AGND AGND A GND
13 AGND SS AGND
14 AGND AGND AGND
15 AGND FS AGND
16 AGND AGND AGND
17 AGND HGB_IN AGND
18 AGND AGND AGND
19 AGND HGB+ AGND
20 AGND HGB- AGND
21 AGND A-12V A-12V
22 AGND A-12V A-12V
23 AGND A+12V A+12V
24 AGND A+12V A+12V
25 AGND A+12V A+12V
26 NC NC NC
27 NC A+70V NC
28 NC NC NC
29 NC NC NC
30 NC AC120_B NC
31 NC NC NC
32 AC120_A NC NC
5-7
Hardware System
Connector J1 for LAN port

Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing
Model: 5406217-1
Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board

Definition Description
1 ET_TP+ Transmit, positive
2 ET_TP- Transmit, negative
3 ET_RP+ Receive, positive
4 ET-NGP Receive, virtual ground
5 ET-NGP Receive, virtual ground
6 ET_RP- Receive, negative
7 ET-NGR Receive, virtual ground
8 ET-NGR Receive, virtual ground
Connector J2 for COM port

Connector type: DB9 male / female connector
Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector)

Pin Definition Description
1 NC
2 RXD/TXD Send/receive
3 TXD/RXD Receive/send
4 NC
5 GND
6-9 NC
Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector)

1 GND
2 NC
3 TXD/RXD Send/receive
4 RXD/TXD Receive/send
5-9 NC
Connector J3 for JTAG

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES
Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX
5-8
Hardware System

1 D3V3
2 GND
3 GND
4 TCK JTAG clock
5 TMS JTAG status select
6 DATA_FROM_AS JTAG data to data board
7 DATA_TO_AS JTAG data to drive board
8 NC
9 GND
10 NC
Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES
Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST'

1 #SUCK_KEY NC
2 GND
3 #RIGHT_DOOR Right door switch on/off
4 GND
5 OPTI_DOOR optical shielding box switch
6 GND
Connector J4 for autoloader board signal

Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST'

1 UART2_TO_AS+ 5474 serial port 2 to positive end of
sample board data
2 UART2_TO_AS- 5474 serial port 2 to negative end of
sample board data
3 UART2_TO_DAT+ sample board serial port to positive
end of 5474 serial port data
4 UART2_TO_DAT- sample board serial port to negative
end of 5474 serial port data
5-9
Hardware System
Connector J5 for indicator board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8 TOP PHSERIES
Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM

1 D+5V
2 #COUNT_KEY Start sampling switch, effective low
3 #INSERT_DOOR Insert STAT switch, effective low
4 FAULT Fault status indicator light, effective high
5 READY Ready status indicator light, effective high
6 NC
7 #BUZ Buzzer driven
8 GND
Connector J7 for laser board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES
Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'

1 NC
2 AGND
3 LASER_CURT Laser current feedback, analog signal
4 A+12V
5 #LASER_ON Laser source on/off signal, effective low
6 D+5V
Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES
Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST'
5-10
Hardware System
Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board

1 AGND
2 FS/SS FS/SS signal input, analog signal
3 AGND
4 AGND
5 A-12V
6 AGND Connecting inner shield of cable
7 A+12V
8 MHOLE Connecting external shield of cable
Connector J11 for HGB module


1 HGB+ HGB light drive,
positive
2 HGB- HGB light drive,
negative
3 HGB_IN HGB feedback
4 AGND
5 AGND
Connector J12 for analog A12V

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial
Model: 1-794509-1 'JST'

1 AGND
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 A+12V
6 AGND
7 AGND
8 A-12V
Connector J13 for AC120V
5-11
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES

Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM

1 AC120V_A A end of 120V AC
2 NC
3 AC120V_B B end of 120V AC
Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3

DIN41612, 96PIN female
Definition of PB1-PB3 signals:
Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left
side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be
arranged at the nearest joint side of board.
Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board

column A column B column C
1 HT1_SA HT1_SB AMBI_SA
2 HT2_SA HT2_SB AMBI_SB
3 POSI_PRESS NEGA_PRESS DGND
4 DGND DGND DGND
5 DGND DGND DGND
6 DGND DGND DGND
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 DGND DGND DGND
9 DGND DGND DGND
10 DGND DGND DGND
11 DGND DGND DGND
12 D+5V D+5V D+5V
13 D+5V D+5V D+5V
14 D+5V D+5V D+5V
15 D+5V D+5V D+5V
16 D+5V D+5V D+5V
17 DGND DGND DGND
18 #LIQ1 #LIQ2 TMS_TO_DRV
19 #LIQ3 #LIQ4 TCK_TO_DRV
20 #LIQ5 #LIQ6 DATA_TO_DRV
21 #LYSE_SENSOR #WASTE_SENSOR DATA_FROM_DRV
22 #LS_ON DGND DGND
5-12
Hardware System
23 DGND DGND DGND

24 OP17_CTRL OP17_STS UART0_TO_DRV
25 OP18_CTRL OP18_STS UART0_TO_DAT
26 OP19_CTRL OP19_STS DGND
27 OP20_CTRL OP20_STS DGND
28 OP1_CTRL OP1_STS OP2_CTRL
29 OP2_STS OP3_CTRL OP3_STS

6 OP16_CTRL OP16_STS DM_ON
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 NC NC NC
9 P+24V SM1_AP SM1_AP
10 P+24V SM1_AN SM1_AN
11 P+24V SM1_BP SM1_BP
12 P+24V SM1_BN SM1_BN
25 PGND SM5_AP SM5_AP
5-13
Hardware System
26 PGND SM5_AN SM5_AN

27 PGND SM5_BP SM5_BP
28 PGND SM5_BN SM5_BN

9 PGND HT1_ON HT1_ON
10 PGND HT2_ON HT2_ON
11 PGND PGND PGND
12 PGND PUMP7 PUMP7
13 PGND PUMP6 PUMP6
14 P+12V PUMP5 PUMP5
19 V1 V2 V3
20 V4 V5 V6
21 V7 V8 V9
22 V10 V11 V12
23 V13 V14 V15
24 V16 V17 V18
25 V19 V20 V21
26 V22 V23 V24
27 V25 V26 V27
28 V28 V29 V30
5-14
Hardware System
29 V31 V32 V33

30 V34 V35 V36
31 V37 V38 V39
32 V40 NC NC
Connector J14 for temperature sensor


1 HT1_SA both ends of thermistor of heater
2 HT1_SB 1
3 HT2_SA both ends of thermistor of heater
4 HT2_SB 2
5 AMBI_SA both ends of thermistor of
6 AMBI_SB environment temperature
Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board
Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST'

1 P+12V
2 PGND
3 DGND
4 POSI_PRESS Pressure chamber (pressure) signal
5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal
6 DGND
7 #VM_ON Volumetric optics is on, effective low
8 #RBC_START RBC volume measurement starts, effective low
9 #RBC_STOP RBC volume measurement stops, effective low
10 #WBC_START WBC volume measurement starts, effective low
11 #WBC_STOP WBC volume measurement stops, effective low
12 D+5V
Connector J16 for liquid level sensor

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP
Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST'
5-15
Hardware System

1 D+5V
2 #LIQ1 LIQ1status, effective low
3 #LIQ2 LIQ 2 status, effective low
7 #LS_ON Control signal for liquid level board
8 GND
9 NC
10 NC
12 GND
13 #LYSE_SENSOR LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective low
14 GND
15 #WASTE_SENSOR Waste level sensor status, effective low
16 GND
17 NC
18 NC
19 OP17_CTRL Optics 17 control
20 OP17_STS Optics 17 status
21 GND
22 GND
25 GND
26 GND
29 GND
30 GND
33 GND
34 GND
Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor

Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors.
5-16
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP

Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST'

1 OP1_CTRL Optics 1 drive
3,4 DGND
7,8 DGND
11,12 DGND
15,16 DGND
19,20 DGND
23,24 DGND

3,4 DGND
7,8 DGND
11,12 DGND
15,16 DGND
5-17
Hardware System

19,20 DGND
23,24 DGND

3,4 DGND
7,8 DGND
11,12 DGND
13 OP16_CTRL Optics 16
15,16 DGND
17-24 NC
Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor


1 DM_ON DC Motor drive
2 NC
3 DGND
Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors

Each connector connects two motors.
Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM
5-18
Hardware System

1 SM1_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 1
2 SM1_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 1
3 SM1-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 1
4 SM1_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 1


4 SM5-BN B-phase coil drive , motor 5
5-19
Hardware System

Connector J27, J28 for heaters


1 P+24V
2 HT1_ON Heater 1 drive
3,4 Heater 1 control

1 P+24V
2 HT2_ON Heater 2 drive
3,4 Heater 2 control
Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves
Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors.
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES
Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)

1~6 NC
7 PUMP7 Pump 7 drive
8 P+12V
10 P+12V
5-20
Hardware System

12 P+12V
14 P+12V
16 P+12V
18 P+12V
20 P+12V

1 V1 Valve 1 drive
2 P+12V
3 V2 Valve 2 drive
4 P+12V
5 V3 Valve 3 drive
6 P+12V
7 V4 Valve 4 drive
8 P+12V
9 V5 Valve 5 drive
10 P+12V
11 V6 Valve 6 drive
12 P+12V
13 V7 Valve 7 drive
14 P+12V
15 V8 Valve 8 drive
16 P+12V
17 V9 Valve 9 drive
18 P+12V
19 V10 Valve 10 drive
20 P+12V

2 P+12V
5-21
Hardware System

4 P+12V
6 P+12V
8 P+12V
10 P+12V
12 P+12V
14 P+12V
16 P+12V
18 P+12V
20 P+12V

2 P+12V
4 P+12V
6 P+12V
8 P+12V
10 P+12V
12 P+12V
14 P+12V
16 P+12V
5-22
Hardware System
18 P+12V
20 P+12V

2 P+12V
4 P+12V
6 P+12V
8 P+12V
10 P+12V
12 P+12V
14 P+12V
16 P+12V
18 P+12V
20 P+12V
Connector J37 for D+5V

Model: 3928-1043

Pin Definition
1 D+5V
2 D+5V
3 DGND
4 DGND
Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V
5-23
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES

Model: 39-31-0108

Pin Definition
1 P+24V
2 P+24V
3 P+24V
4 P+12V
5 P+12V
6 PGND
7 PGND
8 PGND
9 PGND
10 PGND
Connector J34 for fan power


Pin Definition
1 P+12V
2 PGND
Connector J36 for power (autoloader board)

Model: 3928-1063

Pin Definition
1 D+5V
2 P+12V
3 P+24V
4 DGND
5 PGND
6 PGND
5-24
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board
5-25
Hardware System
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points

There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal,
use the touch points of connectors directly.
On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the
configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following
introduction for connection method.
By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via
PC COM port).
1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function
2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data boards function of controlling the drive board
3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function
4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data boards function of controlling the autoloader
board
5. Autoloader board COM: debugging the function of autoloader board
Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and
the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board,
and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board.
JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can
also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the
data board or the autoloader board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 5-3)
See Table 5-42 for configuration details.
Table 5-42 Configuration details

Debugging COM port JP1 JP2
Data board UART0 Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and No jumpers
3-4,
Drive board COM Put jumpers on pins 5-6 No jumpers
and 7-8
Data board UART1 Put jumpers on pins 9-10 Put jumpers on pins
and 11-12. 1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..
Autoloader board Put jumpers on pins 9-10 Put jumpers on pins
COM and 11-12. 9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.
Data board UART3 Put jumpers on pins 13-14 No jumpers.
and 15-16.
A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as
shown in the following table.
5-26
Hardware System
Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection

Connector cable JP3
Serial cable with female 3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16
DB9 male connectors on both ends,
receptacle signals not intercrossed
(straight or 90 Serial cable with female 3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12
installation) connectors on both ends,
signals intercrossed; namely
the COM cable
Serial cable with a female 1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16
DB9 female connector on one end and a
receptacle male connector on the other
(straight or 90 end, signals not intercross;
installation) namely the COM extension
cable
Serial cable with a female 1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12
connector on one end and a
male connector on the other
end, signals intercross
JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive
board or the autoloader board is to be connected to J3.
Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port

JTAG function JP4
Connect MCU JTAG of No jumpers
autoloader board
Connect MCU JTAG of Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and
drive board 7-8.
Note: the mother board does not provide a fixed connection to the JTAG port of the autoloader
MCU. If you need to update the autoloader MCU on the analyzer, connect the J11 and J3
receptacles using the cable dedicated for autoloader update before updating on PC using the
client update software. The dedicated cable is provided to the service and manufacture
personnel, not as an accessory of the analyzer.
5-27
Hardware System
5.1.4 Removal
Purpose
The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, follow the
steps below.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver

107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:

To remove the mother board from the analyzer:
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer
4. Remove the data board and the drive board.
5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws
fixing the bracket.
7. Pull the bracket to remove it.
5-28
Hardware System
Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1

1 Bracket 2 Mother board
3 M4X8 panhead screw
To disassemble the mother board:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws on the mother board.
2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port
connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.
Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2

1 Bracket 2 Mother board
3M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws
5-29
Hardware System
Installation
Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on
the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain
error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet
the whole unit cannot function properly
Verification
1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all
measurements should be within normal ranges.
2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning
correctly.
5.1.5 Troubleshooting
Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a
failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.
Table 5-45 Troubleshooting

Failure Cause Recommended Action
Abnormal voltage cable not properly Check connectors J12, J13, J35,
detected connected to power J37;
connector If the connection is normal, use a
multimeter to check if the voltage
of each power source indicated
on the mother board is correct.
Fan not running. Fan damaged or no power Check connector J34;
supply Check the P12V indicator on the
drive board
Communication failure Connector J4 abnormal.. Check connector J4
of autoloader board Connector J36 abnormal.. Check connector J36
Pressure control Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15

abnormal
Volumetric abnormal Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15
Liquid level inspection Connector J16 abnormal Check connector J16
5-30
Hardware System
abnormal, misinform
Laser not light or laser Connector J17 abnormal Check connector J7
current detected
abnormal
Pre-amp board has no Connectors J9 and J10 Check connectors J9 and J10
power or work abnormal
abnormally.
Motor not active Motor drive cable not Check connectors J22,J23,J24,
properly connected . and 25
Valve not active Valve drive cable not Check connectors J30,J31,J32
properly connected. and J33
Pump not active Pump drive cable not Check connector J29
properly connected
Temperature control Temperature sensor not Check connector J14
fails. properly connected.
5-31
Hardware System
5.2 Data board
5.2.1 Introduction
The data function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The
analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and
converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and
uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the
access interface.
5.2.2 Board composition
Function
The analog part:

Conditioning and converting power
Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage
and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status,
etc.)
Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
Driving constant-current supply
Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels
Zapping apertures
AD conversion
The digital part:

Providing a platform for software operating
Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board
Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board
Providing communication interfaces for PC
Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board
Processing digital signals and identifying pulse
Block diagram
5-32
Hardware System
Figure 5-6 Data board circuit
A12VAC120V
Power for analog
circuits Analog power filter module
signal monitoring of laser current driver

Laser driver
Gain control
RBC/PLT
RBC/PLT amplification RBCPLT
sensor
RBC/PLT aperture
Constant current source

Constant current source/zapping /zapping control
control module of RBC/PLT hole
Monitoring
module
Gain control
WBC
WBC sensor WBC amplification
WBC aperture
Constant current source

Constant current source/zapping /burn control
control module of WBC hole
HGB
Gain control Digital

HGB sensor HGB amplification HGB circuits
of data
board
Driver control
HGB led constant current driver
A/D module
Gain control
SS pre-
SS amplification SS
amplification board
FS base currrent
FS pre- FS
FS amplification
amplification board Gain control
SF
SS pre- SF amplification Gain control
amplification board
Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board
5-33
Hardware System
Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board
Description
The analog part:

Conditioning and converting voltages
The A12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or
converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping
apertures.
Monitoring voltage
The voltage of A12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS
blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.
Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals
WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then
after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
The WBC DIFF signals including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved are first
collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Driving constant-current supply
The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the
RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.
Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels
5-34
Hardware System
The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are
controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC,
RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.
Zapping aperture
If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the
zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperture by high temperature.
AD conversion
The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and
HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing.
The digital part:

Providing a platform for operating system and application software
CPU MCF5474, 266MHz
DDR128M, 133MHz
FLASH16Mx16bit
Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board
Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board
Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading
By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the
autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.
Interface for the indicator board
The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.
Interface for the volumetric board
Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals
Interface for the laser control board
Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current
Key input interface
Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad).
5-35
Hardware System
Status detection interface

Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box
Analog signal input interface
Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes
10M100M network interface
The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross
network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.
BDM debug interface
The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and
writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.
JTAG interface of FPGA
It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.
The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture
electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to
connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved
connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board.
See the following table for the function of each connector.
Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board

Number of
Connector Function Note
pins
Connects the RBC/PLT aperture /
J1 3
electrode
J2 Connects the WBC aperture electrode 3 /
Connects the digital part to the mother /
J3 96
board
Connects the analog part to the /
J7 96
mother board
J8 JTAG interface of FPGA 10 /
J9 Reserved 20 /
J10 Reserved 40 /
J11 Reserved 14 /
J13 BDM interface of CPU 26 /
The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:
5-36
Hardware System
Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board
Definition of J1
J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT.
Table 5-47 Definition of J1

Pin Name Note
1 SHELL Shielding ground
2 RHOLE_A RBC/PLT signals
3 RHOLE_B RBC analog ground
Definition of J2
J2 is the signal interface of WBC.

Pin Name Note
1 WHOLE _B WBC analog ground
2 WHOLE_A WBC signals
3 SHELL Shielding ground
Definition of J3
J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin connector.
5-37
Hardware System

Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function
A1 D+5V Power supply B17 JTAG_TCK_ JTAG clock of autoloader
AS board
A2 D+5V Power supply B18 JTAG_TO_A JTAG sending of
S autoloader board
A3 D+5V Power supply B19 JTAG_FROM JTAG receiving of
_AS autoloader board
A4 D+5V Power supply B20 UART1_TO_ Reserved debug serial
DAT+ port sending
A5 D+5V Power supply B21 UART1_TO_ Reserved debug serial
DAT- port sending
A6 DGND Signal ground B22 DGND Signal ground
A9 DGND Signal ground B25 #VMCTRL Volumetric board enabling
A10 DGND Signal ground B26 #RBC_STAR Start RBC volume
T metering
A11 DGND Signal ground B27 #RBC_STOP Stop RBC volume
metering
A12 TP_TX+ Positive sending B28 #WBC_STAR Start WBC volume
terminal of T metering
network
A13 TP_TX- Negative sending B29 #RBC_STOP Stop WBC volume
terminal of metering
network
A15 DGND Signal ground B31 #LASER_CT Laser board enabling
RL
A16 JTAG_TMS JTAG mode B32 DGND Signal ground
signal
A17 JTAG_TCK JTAG clock signal C1 D+5V Power supply
A18 JTAG_TO_ JTAG sending of C2 D+5V Power supply
DRV drive board
A19 JTAG_TO_ JTAG receiving of C3 D+5V Power supply
DAT drive board
A20 DGND Signal ground C4 D+5V Power supply
A21 DGND Signal ground C5 D+5V Power supply
A22 UART0_TO Serial port C6 DGND Signal ground
5-38
Hardware System
_DRV sending of drive

board
A23 UART0_TO Serial port C7 DGND Signal ground
_DAT receiving of drive
board
A24 DGND Signal ground C8 DGND Signal ground
A28 DGND Signal ground C12 TP_RX+ Positive receiving
terminal of network
A29 DGND Signal ground C13 TP_RX- Negative receiving
terminal of network
A32 DGND Signal ground C16 UART3_TO_ PC communication serial
PC port sending
B1 D+5V Power supply C17 UART3_TO_ PC communication serial
DAT port receiving
B2 D+5V Power supply C18 DGND Signal ground
B3 D+5V Power supply C19 DGND Signal ground
B4 D+5V Power supply C20 UART1_TO_ autoloader board serial
AS+ port sending
B5 D+5V Power supply C21 UART1_TO_ autoloader board serial
AS- port receiving
B6 DGND Signal ground C22 DGND Signal ground
B8 DGND Signal ground C24 Aspiration key control
SUCK_KEY input
B10 DGND Signal ground C26 BUZ Buzzer control output
B11 DGND Signal ground C27 #COUNT_KE Aspirate key control input
Y
B12 PWFBOUT Network power C28 FAULT_J Indicator control output
supply feedback (red)
B13 DGND Signal ground C29 READY_J Indicator control output
(green)
B14 DGND Signal ground C30 OPTI_DOOR Laser shielding box
monitoring input
5-39
Hardware System
B15 DGND Signal ground C31 #RIGHT_DO Right door status

OR monitoring input
B16 JTAG_TMS JTAG mode of C32 #INSERT_KE Compartment door open
_AS autoloader board Y key control input
Definition of J7
J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin plug.

Pin Name Note Pin Name Note
A1 AGND Analog ground B17 HGB_IN HGB signals input
A2 AGND Analog ground B18 AGND Analog ground
A3 AGND Analog ground B19 HGB+ HGB light drive positive
electrode
A4 AGND Analog ground B20 HGB- HGB light drive negative
electrode
A5 AGND Analog ground B21 A-12V -12V power supply
A6 AGND Analog ground B22 A-12V -12V power supply
A7 AGND Analog ground B23 A+12V +12V power supply
A10 AGND Analog ground B26 NC /
A14 AGND Analog ground B30 AC120V_ Zapping voltage input
B
A17 AGND Analog ground C1 AGND Analog ground
5-40
Hardware System
A26 NC / C10 AGND Analog ground

A32 AC120V_ Zapping voltage input C16 AGND Analog ground
A
B1 AGND Analog ground C17 AGND Analog ground
B2 LASER_I Laser current C18 AGND Analog ground
N monitoring input
B5 AGND Analog ground C21 A-12V -12V power supply
B6 AGND Analog ground C22 A-12V -12V power supply
B7 AGND Analog ground C23 A+12V +12V power supply
B10 AGND Analog ground C26 NC /
B11 FS_IN FS signals input C27 NC /
B13 SS_IN SS signals input C29 NC /
B15 SF_IN SF signals input C31 NC /
Definition of J8
J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA.

Pin Name Note
1 FPGA_TCK Clock
2 GND Signal ground
3 FPGA_TDO Data output
4 VDD Power supply
5 FPGA_TMS Testing mode selection
6 VDD Power supply
7 NC /
8 NC /
5-41
Hardware System
9 FPGA_TDI Data input

10 GND Signal ground
Definition of J9
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J10
Reserved. Not available for customers..
Definition of J11
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J13
J11 is the BDM interface of CPU.

Pin Definition Function
1 NC /
2 BKPT# Breakpoint setup
3 GND Signal ground
4 DSCLK synchronizing clock input
5 GND Signal ground
6 TCK Clock input of JATG
7 BDM_RSTI BDM reset
8 DSI Serial input
9 VDD Power supply
10 DSO Serial output
12 PSTDATA7
13 PSTDATA6
14 PSTDATA5
15 PSTDATA4
Configuration data
16 PSTDATA3
17 PSTDATA2
18 PSTDATA1
19 PSTDATA0
21 NC /
22 NC /
5-42
Hardware System
24 PSTCLK Processor clock

25 NC /
26 MCF_TA# Transmission response
Assembly drawing
5-43
Hardware System
Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board
5-44
Hardware System
All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust
the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.
LED function definition
Table 5-53 LED function definition

No. Indicator Function description
1 D17 A-12V power indicator
2 D20 A+12V power indicator
3 D21 A-5V power indicator
4 D22 A+5V power indicator
5 D39 Reserved for software use.
10 D44 Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network
conflicts.
11 D45 100M network communication indicator. It turns on
when enabled.
12 D46 10M network communication indicator. It turns on
when enabled.
13 D47 Network connection indicator. It turns on when
enabled.
14 D48 Network full-duplex communication indicator. It
turns on when enabled.
15 D49 FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on
when the configuration is done.
16 D51 D+5V power indicator
Function definition of test points
5-45
Hardware System
Table 5-54 Test points on data board
Signal Function description

No. Test point
under test
1 +12V AVCC +12V power supply of analog part
2 -12V AVSS -12V power supply of analog part
3 +5V AVDD +5V power supply of analog part
4 -5V AVEE -5V power supply of analog part
5 VR_MON +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part
6 VR_H +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part
Drive voltage of constant current source
7 +56V VCONST
of electrode
A+12V_MO +12V power supply monitoring
8 +12VM
N
A-12V_MO -12V power supply monitoring
9 -12VM
N
Monitor drive voltage of constant current
10 +56VM VCONSTM
source of electrode
11 RHOLE RHOLE RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
12 WHOLE WHOLE WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
13 FSBASE FSBASE FS background voltage monitoring
14 LASER LASER Laser diode drive current monitoring
15 HGB1 HGB1 HGB channel voltage value after I/V
16 NHGB #HGBLED HGB light on-off control
17 HGB HGB HGB measurement voltage value
18 NBURN #BURN Zapping control
Pulse control signals that produce
19 PULSE PULSE
zapping voltage
20 FS_IN FS_IN FS pre-amplification board output signals
21 FS1 FS1 Adjustable amplified FS signals
22 FS FS Analog signals outputted by FS channel
23 SS_IN SS_IN SS pre-amplification board output signals
24 SS1 SS1 Adjustable amplified SS signals
25 SS SS Analog signals outputted by SS channel
26 SF_IN SF_IN SF pre-amplification board output signals
27 SF1 SF1 Adjustable amplified SF signals
28 SF SF Analog signals outputted by SF channel
29 NCONST #CONST Constant current source control
30 NSEL_R #SELECT_ RBC aperture zapping/constant current
5-46
Hardware System
RBC selection control

#SELECT_ WBC aperture zapping/constant current
31 NSEL_W
WBC selection control
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
32 RBC1 RBC1
amplification grade
RBC channel output signals of direct
33 RBC2 RBC2
current restoring grade
RBC channel output signals of low-pass
34 RBC3 RBC3
filter grade
35 RBC RBC RBC channel signals of output grade
PLT channel output signals of direct
36 PLT1 PLT1
PLT channel output signals of low-pass
37 PLT2 PLT2
filter grade
38 PLT PLT PLT channel signals of output grade
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
39 WBC1 WBC1
amplification grade
WBC channel output signals of direct
40 WBC2 WBC2
WBC channel output signals of low-pass
41 WBC3 WBC3
filter grade
42 WBC WBC WBC channel signals of output grade
43 HCLK HCLK HGB and clock of monitoring voltage
44 HGND HGND Analog ground
45 RBCF RBCF Signals inputted into AD from RBC
46 VR_R VR_R AD reference voltage of RBC
47 RAGND RAGND Analog ground
48 RCLK RCLK AD clock signals of RBC
49 WBCF WBCF Signals inputted into AD from WBC
50 VR_W VR_W AD reference voltage of WBC
51 WAGND WAGND Analog ground
52 WCLK WCLK AD clock signals of WBC
53 PLTF PLTF Signals inputted into AD from PLT
54 VR_P VR_P AD reference voltage of PLT
55 PAGND PAGND Analog ground
56 PCLK PCLK AD clock signals of PLT
57 MCLK MCLK AD clock of monitoring voltage
58 FSF FSF AD input from FS
59 FSCLK FSCLK AD clock signals of FS
5-47
Hardware System
60 SSF SSF AD input from SS

61 SSCLK SSCLK AD clock signals of SS
62 SFF SFF AD input from SF
63 SFCLK SFCLK AD clock signals of SF
MCF_FBAD Flexbus address data 1 of CPU
64 TP8
1
65 TP9
2
FPGA_DDR VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
66 TP37
_VRF
67 TP45 VCC +5V digital power supply
68 TP46 VDD +3.3V digital power supply
69 TP47 D_1V5 +1.5V digital power supply
D_1V2_FG +1.2V digital power supply
71 TP57
PA
73 TP74 #MCF_CS1 Flexbus CS1 of CPU
74 TP75 MCF_R/#W Flexbus read/write signals of CPU
75 TP76
6
76 TP78 D_1V25VTT VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
77 TP79 #MCF_CS0 Flexbus CS0 of CPU
FPGA_DDR +2.5V DDR power on FPGA
78 TP80
_2V5
FPGA_DDR VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
79 TP81
_VTT
80 TP82
5
D_1V25VR VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
81 TP83
F
82 TP85
5
83 TP86 #MCF_OE Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU
MCF_TS Address latch indication of Flexbus of
84 TP87
CPU
85 TP95
3
86 TP96 #MCF_RST Reset input signals of CPU
5-48
Hardware System
I
#MCF_IRQ Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU
87 TP101
1
88 TP102
2
89 TP103
3
90 TP104
5
91 TP105
6
92 TP106
7
AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are
connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope
probe grounded end.
Data board key definition
Table 5-55 Key definition

No. Function
S12 Manually reset the main CPU
5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method
Purpose
Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..
Tools

Disassembly
Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
5-49
Hardware System
Remove the data board from the main unit:

1. Shut down the analyzer.
2. Remove the left door.
3. Remove the top cover board
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from
the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover.
5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board.
6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and
then draw the data board out.
Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1
1---Upper cover of the shielding box of 2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

data board (with washer)
3---Data board 4---Hand-tightened screws
Further disassembly of the data board

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the data board.
5-50
Hardware System
2. Remove the data board from the bracket.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6
socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.
Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw 2---Data board
M3x6 (with washer)
3---Bracket 4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data
board
5---Panhead screw M4X8 6---Socket cap screws M3X12
Assembly
Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on.
2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization.
3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.
The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board
are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the
corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range
indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out
5-51
Hardware System
the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly.
Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part

No. Error Character Possible Cause Recommended action
1 12V power The voltage of the Improper cable Reconnect the cable or
supply error +12V test point connection with change a new cable
exceeds the range the mother board
of 120.6V; or the or disconnection
ripple noise is caused by a
greater than 50mV. broken cable
Improper 12V Check whether the proper
power supply sent power supply is sent by the
by the mother mother board or the power
board or the board
power board
Inductor L16 or Re-solder or change the
capacitor C111, component
C95 and C88 are
damaged or not
properly soldered.
2 -12V power The voltage of the Improper cable Reconnect the cable or
supply error -12V test point connection with change a new cable
exceeds the range the mother board
of -120.6V; or the or disconnection
ripple noise is caused by a
greater than 50mV. broken cable
Improper -12V Check whether the proper
power supply sent power supply is sent by the
by the mother mother board or the power
board or the board
power board
Inductor L18 or Re-solder or change the
capacitor C112, component
C94 and C87 are
damaged or not
properly soldered
5-52
Hardware System
3 +5V power The voltage of the The +5V relating First ensure the +12V power
supply error +5V test point circuit is rosin supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range jointed; the power check the +5V relating circuit,
of +50.25 V supplys re-solder or change the
impedance to the component.
ground is
decreased; or
power chip U14 is
damaged
4 -5V power The voltage of the The -5V relating First ensure the -12V power
supply error -5V test point circuit is rosin supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range jointed; the power check the -5V relating circuit,
of -50.25 V supplys re-solder or change the
impedance to the component.
ground is
decreased; or
power chip U12 is
damaged
5 +2.5V reference The voltage of the If the +5V (AVDD) Check the relating circuit;
power supply VR_MON or VR_H power supply re-solder or change the
error test point exceeds works normally, component
the range of then the problem
2.50.125 V occurred probably
because power
chip U45 or U43,
and its peripheral
components are
damaged or not
properly soldered.
6 +56 constant The voltage of the The boost circuit Check the chip U72, U70,
current drive VCONST test point works improperly U71 and their peripherals for
power supply exceeds the range any rosin joint or damage
error of 563V The 56V Re-solder or change the
voltage-regulator component
diode is damaged
or not properly
soldered.
5-53
Hardware System
7 +56V monitoring The voltage of the If the +56V power Check the U39 and relating
voltage error +56VM test point supply works components; re-solder or
exceeds the range normally, then the change the component
of 1.370.2V problem occurred
probably because
something is
wrong with the
monitoring circuit..
8 +12V monitoring The voltage of the The relating circuit If the +12V power supply
voltage error +12VM test point is not properly works normally, check U40
exceeds the range soldered; the and the relating components,
of 1.8V-2.2V power supplys re-solder or change the
impendence to the component.
ground is
decreased;
Something is
wrong with the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
9 -12V monitoring The voltage of the The relating circuit Check U40 and the relating
voltage error -12VM test point is not properly components, re-solder or
exceeds the range soldered; the change the component under
of 2.2V-2.6V power supplys the circumstance that the
impendence to the -12V power supply works
ground is normally
decreased;
Something is
wrong with the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
10 RBC aperture The value of the Constant current Check whether the constant
voltage aperture voltage source control current source control signals
monitoring error exceeds the range signals abnormal, are normal. See the
of 10V-14V 56V foregoing troubleshooting to
voltage-regulator remove the error of 56V
diode abnormal or circuit.
boost circuit error
Bath not properly Check the bath wiring;
wired; clogging. perform the unclogging
procedure
5-54
Hardware System
Monitoring circuit Components of Check whether the relating

error the monitoring circuit or AD works normally.
circuit are not
properly soldered,
or the
corresponding AD
works abnormally.
11 WBC aperture Same as point 10 Same as point 10 Same as point 10
voltage
monitoring error
12 HGB HGB value of the HGB light error or Check whether HGB light is
background test point exceeds the gain on, or adjust the gain multiple
voltage the normal range of HGB channel
abnormal (4.2V-4.8V) The Check whether the
corresponding AD corresponding AD works
works abnormally, normally.
or the error
message is
accidentally
triggered by
improper wiring.
13 FS background The value of the The flow cell is Clean the flow cell in time, or
voltage FSBASE test point dirty, or something check whether the U38 and
monitoring error exceeds the normal is wrong with the the corresponding AD chip
range (0-400mv) corresponding U44 work normally.
monitoring circuit
error.
14 Laser diode The value of the Something is Check whether the cable is
drive current LASER test point wrong with the properly connected to the
monitoring error exceeds the range current value sent laser control board and
of 1.0-3.0V. by the laser whether the monitoring value
control board sent from the laser control
board is normal
5-55
Hardware System
Data board Check whether the operation

monitoring circuit amplifier U38 and the
error, the corresponding AD chip U44
corresponding AD work normally.
error or
connection cable
abnormal
15 RBC aperture No sound is heard Something is Ensuring the wiring of the
zapping error and no bubbles are wrong with the bath is correct, then check
produced when zapping voltage whether the AC120V zapping
zapping the bath supplied by the power of the power board is
power board, or proper, or check whether the
with the part of the zapping control signals are
data board that effective.
controls zapping.
16 WBC aperture Same as point 15 Same as point 15 Same as point 15
zapping error
17 No No WBC/RBC/PLT Bath wiring error, Use a oscilloscope to check
WBC/RBC/PLT result, or the result analog part whether the analog channel
result displays *** channel error, AD can output correct signals. If
collection error or no signal is detected,,
algorithm check the amplification stage
identification error by stage, and check the AD
collection and data uploading
as well.
18 WBC/RBC/PLT WBC/RBC/PLT Bad shielding, First ensure the bath and the
background background constant current fluidics work normally, and
abnormal abnormal source abnormal, then check the shielding and
analog channel grounding, check
resistor-capacitor components (such as
components resistors) of the constant
incorrect or current source, or check the
abnormal resistor-capacitor and
operation amplifier of the
signal conditioning channel.
5-56
Hardware System
Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part

No. Error Causes and solutions
1 System startup failed Possible causes: input power supply error, including
improper power cord connection, abnormal power
supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that
causes the operating system to fail to be
downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error
that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system
clock abnormal.
Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system,
and then check whether the error still exists; check
whether the power indicator D51 is on; check
whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to
check the voltage of each power supply; use an
oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal
oscillator output X2 is normal.
2 Network communication failed Possible causes: network connection abnormal;
using non-standard network cable; network chip
damaged, etc.
Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with
the specified shielding-cross network cable. If
nothing is wrong with the network connection and the
settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output
by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip
U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.
3 Abnormal communication with Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of autoloader board U66 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check whether the interface signals are
normal by an oscilloscope.
4 volumetric board signals, laser Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
shielding box status and right U74 damaged.
door status can not be detected Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check the interface signals by an
oscilloscope.
5 Abnormal communication with Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of drive board U67 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check the interface signals by an
oscilloscope.
5-57
Hardware System
6 Events of Aspirate Key, Count Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
Key and Compartment Door U67 damaged.
Open Key can not be detected, Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
or the buzzer and indicator on proper; check the interface signals by an
the indicator board are out of oscilloscope.
control.
5-58
Hardware System
5.3 Drive board
5.3.1 Introduction
The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters
etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of
temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.
Function
Serial communication
Driving stepping motors
Driving valves and pumps
Temperature control
Pressure control
System status detection
Reagent status detection
Block diagram
2-channel temperature A
measurement MS1
2-channel pressure measurement AN
3-channel power voltage MS2 B MOTOR
measurement A3979
STEP BN
Temperature SLEEP
ALE
Pressure HOLD
Power WR
Voltage RD 8-channel Step-motor driver
(anolog 8 module
signal) A/D[7:0]
A[15:8] IN
Databoard TXD
EN 74HC595
UART RXD F_INT CLK + SV1~SV40
IRLML2502
C8051F020 F_NCONFIG LATCH 40
TMS EP1C6Q240C8
NCSO
Databoard TDI
DATA 40-channel solenoid valve
JTAG CLK control
DCLK
TDO
ASDO
M_SEN HOA0880-
CD74HC14
Pump T51
Heater
6 20-channel motor position sensor
detection
EPCS1S18N
7-channel high power pump & valve L-
control SEN/SWITCH Liquid level sensor
74LVCR2245
2-channel heater control or sensitive switch
8-channel liquid level sensor & sensitive switch detection
Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board
5-59
Hardware System
Description
Serial communication
The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial
communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication
with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and
responds accordingly. Communication parameters:
Baud Rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Parity: even
UART1 is reserved.
Stepping motor driving

The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the
control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the
motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample
injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe
motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.
Valve and pump driving

The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34
valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU
writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the
data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip
74HC595, and drive the valves through the MOS transistor IRLML2502. The MCU first sends
the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip
ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively.
Temperature Control
The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the
optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values,
the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends
heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two
heaters.
Air pressure control

The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure
chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by
5-60
Hardware System
the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of
the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output
to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is
adjusted.
System status detection
The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother
board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter.
Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and
amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD
conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained.
The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive
board.
Reagent status detection

The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection
channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the
following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.
The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612
receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals
(including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard
directly. The connectors layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure
below.
5-61
Hardware System
Position sensor Liquid level sensor Valve

JTAG Optical train temperature PUMP
UART Reaction pool temperature Heater
Pressure Ambient temperature 2-channel step-motor
6-channel step-motor
+5V +24V +12V
Base board
PB1 Socket PB2 Socket PB3 Socket

J4 J5 J3
Board mounting
bracket & guide 96Pin
Socket 96Pin
channel
Driver board
J9
Support board
J1 J10 J8 J2
Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board

The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table.
Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board
Number of
Connector Function Note
pins
FPGA configuration interface Used when FPGA first
J1 10
(AS mode) downloading
Not used on complete
J2 FPGA Debug Interface 10
device
Control interface of
J3 Interface with the motherboard 96 valves, pumps and
heaters
Sensor detection and
J4 Interface with the motherboard 96
communication interface
J5 Interface with the motherboard 96 Motor control interface
Communication Debug Not used on complete
J8 4
Interface device
Used when MCU first
J9 MCU Debug Interface 10
downloading
Communication Debug Not used on complete
J10 4
Interface device
5-62
Hardware System
Definition of J1
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).
Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration
Pin Name Pin Name

1 F_DCLK 2 AGND
3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD
5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE
7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC
9 F_ASDO 10 GND
Definition of J2
J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode).
Definition of J3
J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves,
pumps and heaters control.
Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3
Pin Definition Note

1
2
3
4
5
6
7 PGND Power ground
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 12V0 12V power supply
17
18
19 SV1 Control signal for Valve 1
5-63
Hardware System

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
33 M7-A
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
34 M7-AN
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
35 M7-B
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
36 M7-BN
X motor (SM 7)
37 M8-A
Y motor (SM 8)
38 M8-AN
Y motor (SM 8)
39 M8-B
Y motor (SM 8)
40 M8-BN
Y motor (SM 8)
41 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater
42 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater
43 PGND Power ground
44 PUMP7 Control signal for Pump 7 (Reserved. No output)
48 PUMP3 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
50 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
51 Sv2 Control signal for Valve 2
5-64
Hardware System

64 NC Empty
65 M7-A
X motor (SM 7)
66 M7-AN
X motor (SM 7)
67 M7-B
X motor (SM 7)
68 M7-BN
X motor (SM 7)
69 M8-A
Y motor (SM 8)
70 M8-AN
Y motor (SM 8)
71 M8-B
Y motor (SM 8)
72 M8-BN
Y motor (SM 8)
73 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater
74 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater
75 PGND Power ground
79 PUMP4 Control signal for pinch valve V39
82 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
5-65
Hardware System

96 NC Empty
Definition of J4
J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor
detection and communication.
Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4
Pin Name Note

1 PRTO_T1 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)
2 PRTO_T2 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)
3 PRESSURE_1ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)
4
5
6
7
GND GND
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 VCC 5V power supply
15
16
17 GND GND
18 LIQ_SIN1 Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor
5-66
Hardware System
19 LIQ_SIN3 Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor

20 LIQ_SIN5 Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)
21 LIQ_SIN7 Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor
22 LS_CTRL Control signal for liquid-level sampling
23 GND Digital ground
24 VC_SIN17 Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)
Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position
28 VC_SIN1
sensor (OP1)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe
29 M_SIN2
initial position sensor (OP 2)
Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position
30 VC_SIN4
sensor (OP 4)
Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position
31 M_SIN5
sensor (OP 5)
33 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
34 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
35 PRESSURE_2ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)
36
37
38
39
GND Digital ground
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
50 LIQ_SIN2 Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor
51 LIQ_SIN4 Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor
52 LIQ_SIN6 Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor
5-67
Hardware System
53 LIQ_SIN8 Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)

54
GND Digital ground
55
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17
56 M_SIN17
(reserved)
57 M_SIN18
(reserved)
58 M_SIN19
(reserved)
59 M_SIN20
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial
60 M_SIN1
position sensor (OP 1)
Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position
61 VC_SIN3
sensor (OP 3)
Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position
62 M_SIN4
sensor (OP 4)
Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP
63 VC_SIN6
6)
64 M_SIN7 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
65 AMBINET_T_A Input signal of ambient temperature sensor
66
67
68
69
70
GND Digital ground
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
79
80
82 TMS TMS signal of JTAG interface
83 TCK Clock signal of JTAG interface
5-68
Hardware System
84 TDI Data input pin of JTAG interface

85 TDO Data output pin of JTAG interface
86
GND Digital ground
87
88 UP_TX Serial port sending data signal (UART0)
89 UP_RX Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)
90
GND Digital ground
91
Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial
92 VC_SIN2
Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial
93 M_SIN3
Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position
94 VC_SIN5
sensor (OP 5)
Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor
95 M_SIN6
(OP 6)
Definition of J5
J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the
stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection.
Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5
Pin Definition Note

2 VC_SEN10 Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)
4 VC_SEN13 Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)
Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP
5 M_SIN14
14)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor
6 VC_SEN16
(OP 16)
8 NC Empty
9 24V0 24V power supply
10
11
12
13
5-69
Hardware System
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PGND Power ground
29
30
31
32
33 VC_SEN9 Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP
34 M_SIN10
10)
35 VC_SEN12 Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12)
Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP
36 M_SIN13
13)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor
37 VC_SEN15
(OP 15)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position
38 M_SIN16
sensor (OP 16)
40 NC Empty
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
41 M1_A
(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
42 M1_AN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
43 M1_B
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
44 M1_BN
motor (SM 1)
5-70
Hardware System
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection

45 M2_A
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
46 M2_AN
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
47 M2_B
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
48 M2_BN
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
49 M3_A
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
50 M3_AN
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
51 M3_B
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
52 M3_BN
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
53 M4_A
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
54 M4_AN
(SM 4)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
55 M4_B
(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
56 M4_BN
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
57 M5_A
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
58 M5_AN
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
59 M5_B
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
60 M5_BN
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
61 M6_A
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
62 M6_AN
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
63 M6_B
reserved)
64 M6_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
5-71
Hardware System
6, reserved)
65 M_SIN9 Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
66 VC_SEN11 Sending end power signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP
67 M_SIN12
12)
68 VC_SEN14 Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position
69 M_SIN15
sensor (OP 15)
70 DCM DC motor control signal (reserved)
72 NC Empty
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
73 M1_A
(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
74 M1_AN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
75 M1_B
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
76 M1_BN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection
77 M2_A
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
78 M2_AN
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
79 M2_B
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
80 M2_BN
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
81 M3_A
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
82 M3_AN
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
83 M3_B
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
84 M3_BN
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
85 M4_A
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
86 M4_AN
(SM 4)
5-72
Hardware System
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

87 M4_B
(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
88 M4_BN
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
89 M5_A
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
90 M5_AN
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
91 M5_B
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
92 M5_BN
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
93 M6_A
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
94 M6_AN
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
95 M6_B
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
96 M6_BN
6, reserved)
Definition of J8
J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.
Definition of J9
J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode).
Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9
Pin Name Pin Name

1 VDD 2 GND
3 GND 4 TCK
5 TMS 6 TDO
7 TDI 8 NC
9 GND 10 NC
Definition of J10
J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.
5-73
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board
5-74
Hardware System
Table 5-64 LED definition
Indicator Note
D1 FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration.
FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works

D2
normally.
24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power
D49
supply is normal.
3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power
D50
supply is normal.
12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power
D51
supply is normal.
5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog
D52
power supply is normal.
D65 MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.
D66 Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.
Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during

D67
heating.
Table 5-65 Test point definition
No. Name Pin Note
1 TP1 PIN26 of U2 FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG

FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals
2 TP2 PIN28 of U2
FPGA_CLK
Address latch enabling signals of MCU
3 TP3 PIN228 of U2
external bus ALE
4 TP4 PIN50 of U2 Read signals of MCU external bus /RD
5 TP5 PIN20 of U2 FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT
6 TP6 PIN73 of U2 Write signals of MCU external bus /WR
5-75
Hardware System
7 TP7 PIN11 of U2 FPGA reset signals F_RST

Voltage of +1.5VDC power supply
8 TP8 1V5
(1.50.075V)
9 TP9 SIO_IN Data input signals of MCU valve control chip
10 TP10 SIO_CLK Clock signals of MCU valve control chip
11 TP11 SIO_EN Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip
12 TP12 SIO_LATCH Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip

Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X
13 TP13 PIN17 of U10
motor STEP7
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y
14 TP14 PIN15 of U9
motor STEP8
Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe
motor STEP1
Stepping pulse signals of sample injection
syringe motor STEP2
Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe
motor STEP3
Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor
STEP4
Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe
motor STEP5
Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor
STEP6 (not used)
21 TP22 VDD
(3.30.15V)
22 TP23
GND Digital ground
23 TP24
24 TP25 1V5
(1.50.075V)
Ambient temperature detection signals
25 TP26 PIN1 of U32
(voltage) AMBINET_T
Detection signals of VCC+5VDC after
26 TP27 ADC_VCC
voltage-dividing 2.000.15V
Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after
27 TP28 ADC_12V
Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after
28 TP29 ADC_24V
29 TP30 PIN1 of U33 Pressure chamber detection signals
5-76
Hardware System
(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST
Vacuum chamber detection signals
30 TP31 PIN7 of U33
(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST
Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital
31 TP34 PIN2 of U37
module REFIN2.500.006V
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
34 TP35 PIN100 of U35
channel 0
MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals
CLKIN
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
channel 1
37 TP38 PIN57 of U35 MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK
Amplifier output signals of the temperature
38 TP39 PIN6 of U45
collection module TEMPER_AD
Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals
39 TP40 PRTD_REF
of the temperature collection module
Reference voltage of temperature collection
40 TP41 PIN2 of U45
module amplifier
Input voltage of temperature collection
41 TP42 PIN3 of U45
module amplifier
Driving reference voltage of sample syringe
42 TP43 PIN8 of U22
motor VREF1
Driving reference voltage of sample
43 TP44 PIN8 of U23
injection syringe motor VREF2
Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe
44 TP45 PIN8 of U24
motor VREF3
Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe
45 TP46 PIN8 of U29
motor VREF4
Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe
46 TP47 PIN8 of U28
motor VREF5
Driving reference voltage of reserved motor
47 TP48 PIN8 of U27
VREF6 (not used)
Driving reference voltage of sample probe X
48 TP49 PIN8 of U11
motor VREF7
Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y
49 TP50 PIN8 of U13
motor VREF8
Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
5-77
Hardware System
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.
Purpose
The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if
any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.
Tools

Disassembly
Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Remove the drive board from the main unit:
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;
2. Open the left door;
3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board,
and then draw the drive board out.
5-78
Hardware System
Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1

1---Hand-tightened screws 2---Drive board
Further disassembly of the drive board

(M3X6) from the drive board.
2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.
Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2

1---Drive board 2---Bracket
3---Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3x6 (with washer)
5-79
Hardware System
Assembly
Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
z Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.
z Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.
Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board.
2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the drive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51
turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the self-test screen of
the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully;
otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
4. Readjust the sample probe position as per Section 6.10.1 and save the result.
Error analysis and solutions
Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the
form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with
the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error
names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the
screen as the software help information.
When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related
connections are properly connected. For example, when Sample probe action failed is
reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to
the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut
down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether
the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the
sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor
connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the
sample probe assembly if necessary).
5-80
Hardware System
Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error
according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the
error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive
board.
The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table.
Table 5-66 Troubleshooting errors with the drive board

Recommended
Error code Error name Error feature
action
FPGA does not allow the MCU write
data into the valve-pump data
register within 50ms, i.e. the serial
Valve output output status indication bit in the
0100 Replace drive board
failed register (which is used to judge the
status of valves and pumps of
FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA
error or MCU read register error.
Valve NO. out
Communication
of limit (greater Download Valve NO. out of limit
0101 abnormal. Please try
than 40 or (greater than 40 or equal to 0)
again.
equal to 0)
1. X motor error, action
X motor failed is interfered.
X motor does not move to the
0201 to move to 2. X motor target
pre-set target position after action
target position position photocoupler
error.
X motor failed 1. X motor error, action
to move to is interfered.
X motor is not at the home position
0202 home position 2. X motor initial
after initialization
after position photocoupler
initialization error.
X motor failed
is interfered.
to leave home X motor failed to leave home
0203 2. X motor initial
position after position when initializing
position photocoupler
initialization
error.
Adjusting X X motor does not move to target
is interfered.
0204 motor to target position after the adjusting command
2. X motor target
position failed is executed.
position photocoupler
5-81
Hardware System
error.
Adjusting X
X motor does not back to home is interfered.
motor back to
0205 position after the adjusting command 2. X motor initial
home position
is executed position photocoupler
failed
error.
Adjusting X
X motor does not leave home is interfered.
motor to leave
0206 position after the adjusting command 2. X motor initial
home position
failed
error.
X motor
X motor adjustment is out of limit [1, Re-send the X motor
0207 adjustment
9] adjusting command
error
X motor
X motor adjusting steps at the target Adjust the X motor
0208 adjusting steps
position are out of limit [-20, 20] again
out of limit
X motor The position in the X motor adjusting
Re-send the X motor
0209 adjusting end end command disagrees with the
adjusting command
position error pre-send adjusting position
1. Y motor error, action
Y motor failed is interfered.
Y motor does not move to the
0211 to move to 2. Y motor target
pre-set target position after action
target position position photocoupler
error.
Y motor is not at the upper position
0212 to initialize to 2. Y motor upper
after initialization
upper position position photocoupler
error.
Y motor does not move to lower
0213 to initialize to 2. Y motor lower
position when initializing
lower position position photocoupler
error.
Adjusting Y Y motor does not move to target is interfered.
0214 motor to target position after the adjusting command 2. Y motor target
position failed is executed. position photocoupler
error.
5-82
Hardware System

Adjusting Y Y motor does not back to upper is interfered.
0215 motor to upper position after the adjusting command 2. Y motor upper
position failed is executed position photocoupler
error.
Adjusting Y
Y motor does not leave upper is interfered.
motor to leave
0216 position after the adjusting command 2. Y motor upper
upper position
failed
error.
Y motor
Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1, Re-send the Y motor
0217 adjustment
6] adjusting command
error
Y motor
Y motor adjusting steps at the target Adjust the Y motor
0218 adjusting steps
position are out of limit [-63,63] again
out of limit
Y motor The position in the Y motor adjusting
Re-send the Y motor
0219 adjusting end end command disagrees with the
adjusting command
position error pre-send adjusting position
Send the sample
Sample probe
X motor or Y motor action is not probe command after
0220 assembly is
finished. the sample probe
working
action is finished
Can not send the command to move
You can adjust the
the sample probe
Cannot adjust sample probe only
0221 upward/downward/leftward/rightward
sample probe after the adjusting
by one step before sending the
command is sent.
adjusting command.
X motor action The action time is longer than the
0222
overtime download time.
X motor is not at the photocoupler Move the Y motor to
X motor action
0223 position or Y motor is not at the upper photocoupler
forbidden
upper photocoupler position position
X motor does
X motor current position does not
0224 not match Initialize the X motor
match the photocoupler position
current position
Y motor action The action time is longer than the
0225
overtime download time.
X motor action X motor is not at the photocoupler Move the X motor to
0226
forbidden position the photocoupler
5-83
Hardware System
position
Y motor does
Y motor current position does not
0227 not match Initialize the Y motor
match the photocoupler position
current position
Y motor failed
Y motor is not at the lower position
0228 to pierce to Pierce again
after piercing
lower position
Y motor failed
Y motor failed to back to upper
0229 to pierce to Pierce again
position when piercing
upper position
X motor
X motor photocoupler might be Replace X motor
0230 photocoupler
damaged photocoupler
error
Sample probe
RBC bath RBC bath photocoupler might be Replace RBC bath
0231
photocoupler damaged photocoupler
error
Sample probe
WBC bath WBC bath photocoupler might be Replace WBC bath
0232
error
Sample probe
DIFF bath DIFF bath photocoupler might be Replace DIFF bath
0233
error
Y motor
Y motor photocoupler might be Replace X motor
0234 photocoupler
damaged photocoupler
error
Sample probe
upper Upper photocoupler might be Replace the upper
0235
error
Sample probe
lower Lower photocoupler might be Replace the lower
0236
error
Sampling syringe does not finish the
Sampling Command is sent early
previous action when it is requested
0300 syringe is while the sampling
for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
working syringe is still working.
dispensing.
5-84
Hardware System
1. Sampling syringe
photocoupler error (if
Sampling sampling syringe
The detected photocoupler signals
syringe motor moves)
0301 are without any change before and
photocoupler 2. Sampling syringe
after action.
abnormal motor error (if
sampling syringe
motor dose not move)
1. Sampling syringe
the sampling syringe
Sampling After aspirating or dispensing, the
motor is at the home
syringe sampling syringe should be at the
position)
0302 aspirating or home position, but the position
2. Sampling syringe
dispensing detected by the photocoupler
motor error (if the
action failed 1 disagrees
sampling syringe
motor is not at the
home position)
1. Sampling syringe
the sample syringe
Sampling After aspirating or dispensing, the
motor is not at the
syringe sampling syringe should not be at
home position)
0303 aspirating or the home position, but the position
2. Sampling syringe
dispensing detected by the photocoupler
motor error (if the
action failed 2 disagrees
sampling syringe
motor is at the home
position)
Sampling
Before aspirating or dispensing, the Sampling syringe
syringe
sampling syringe should be at the photocoupler error (if
aspirating or
0304 home position, but the actual the sampling syringe
dispensing
position detected by the motor is at the home
action
photocoupler disagrees position)
forbidden
Sampling
Before aspirating or dispensing, the Sampling syringe
syringe
sampling syringe should not be at photocoupler error (if
aspirating or
0305 the home position, but the actual the sampling syringe
dispensing
position detected by the motor is not at the
action
photocoupler disagrees home position)
forbidden 2
5-85
Hardware System
Check and make sure

nothing is wrong with
Sample syringe
Requested volume + aspirated aspirating and
0306 aspirate volume
volume > maximum aspirate volume dispensing action; then
over range
consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Sample syringe aspirating and
dispense Requested volume > aspirated dispensing action; then
0307
volume over volume consider programming
range overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Sampling
The action time is longer than the
0308 syringe action
download time.
overtime
Sample Sample injection syringe does not Command is sent early
injection finish the previous action when it is while the sample
0310
syringe is requested for initializing, resetting, injection syringe is still
working aspirating or dispensing. working.
1. Sample injection
syringe photocoupler
error (if sample
Sample
injection syringe motor
injection The detected photocoupler signals
moves)
0311 syringe are without any change before and
2. Sample injection
photocoupler after action.
syringe motor error (if
abnormal
sample injection
syringe motor does not
move)
Sample 1. Sample injection
After aspirating or dispensing, the
injection syringe photocoupler
syringe should be at the home
0312 syringe error (if sample
position, but the position detected by
aspirating or injection syringe is at
the photocoupler disagrees
dispensing the home position)
5-86
Hardware System
action failed 1 2. Sample injection

syringe motor error (if
sample injection
syringe is not at the
home position)
1. Sample injection
syringe photocoupler
Sample error (if sample
injection After aspirating or dispensing, the injection syringe is not
syringe syringe should not be at the home at the home position)
0313
aspirating or position, but the position detected by 2. Sample injection
dispensing the photocoupler disagrees syringe motor error (if
action failed 2 sample injection
syringe is at the home
position)
Sample
injection Sample injection
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe syringe photocoupler
0314 aspirating or error (if sample
dispensing injection syringe is at
action the home position)
forbidden 1
Sample
injection Sample injection
syringe syringe photocoupler
syringe should not be at the home
0315 aspirating or error (if sample
dispensing injection syringe is not
action at the home position)
forbidden 2
Check and make sure
Sample
injection
0316 syringe aspirate
volume over
range
debugging phase.
Sample Check and make sure
Requested volume > aspirated
0317 injection nothing is wrong with
volume
syringe the sampling syringe
5-87
Hardware System
dispense aspirating and

volume over dispensing action; then
range consider programming
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Sample
injection The action time is longer than the
0318
syringe action download time.
overtime
Sheath fluid syringe does not finish
sheath fluid Command is sent early
the previous action when it is
0320 syringe is while the sheath fluid
requested for initializing, resetting,
working syringe is still working.
aspirating or dispensing.
1. Sheath fluid syringe
Sheath fluid sheath fluid syringe
The detected photocoupler signals
syringe motor moves)
0321 are without any change before and
photocoupler 2. Sheath fluid syringe
after action.
abnormal motor error (if sheath
fluid syringe motor
dose not move)
sheath fluid syringe
Sheath fluid
After aspirating or dispensing, the motor is at the home
syringe
syringe should be at the home position)
0322 aspirating or
position, but the position detected by 2. Sheath fluid syringe
dispensing
the photocoupler disagrees motor error (if sheath
action failed 1
fluid syringe motor is
not at the home
position)
Sheath fluid photocoupler error (if
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe sheath fluid syringe
0323 aspirating or motor is not at the
dispensing home position)
action failed 2 2. Sheath fluid syringe
motor error (if sheath
5-88
Hardware System
fluid syringe motor is

at the home position)
Sheath fluid
syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the Sheath fluid syringe
aspirating or syringe should be at the home photocoupler error (if
0324
dispensing position, but the position detected by sample syringe motor
action the photocoupler disagrees is at the home position)
forbidden 1
Sheath fluid
Sheath fluid syringe
syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home
0325 sample syringe motor
dispensing position, but the position detected by
is not at the home
action the photocoupler disagrees
position)
forbidden 2
Check and make sure
Sheath fluid the sampling syringe
syringe aspirate Requested volume + aspirated aspirating and
0326
volume over volume > maximum aspirate volume dispensing action; then
range consider programming
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Sheath fluid
aspirating and
syringe
Requested volume > aspirated dispensing action; then
0327 dispense
volume consider programming
volume over
range
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Sheath fluid
The action time is longer than the
0328 syringe action
download time.
overtime
Lyse syringe does not finish the
Command is sent early
Lyse syringe is previous action when it is requested
0330 while the lyse syringe
working for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
is still working.
dispensing.
0331 Lyse syringe The detected photocoupler signals 1. Lyse syringe
5-89
Hardware System
photocoupler are without any change before and photocoupler error (if
abnormal after action. the lyse syringe motor
moves)
2. Lyse syringe motor
error (if the lyse
syringe motor does not
move)
1. Lyse syringe
Lyse syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the the lyse syringe motor
aspirating or syringe should be at the home is at the home position)
0332
dispensing position, but the position detected by 2. Lyse syringe motor
action failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees error (if the lyse
syringe motor is not at
the home position)
1. Lyse syringe
the lyse syringe motor
Lyse syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the
is not at the home
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home
0333 position)
dispensing position, but the position detected by
2. Lyse syringe motor
action failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees
error (if the lyse
syringe motor is at the
home position)
Lyse syringe
Before aspirating or dispensing, the Lyse syringe
aspirating or
syringe should be at the home photocoupler error (if
0334 dispensing
position, but the position detected by the lyse syringe motor
action
the photocoupler disagrees is at the home position)
forbidden 1
Lyse syringe Lyse syringe
aspirating or photocoupler error (if
0335 dispensing the lyse syringe motor
action is not at the home
forbidden 2 position)
Check and make sure
Lyse syringe
Requested volume + aspirated the sampling syringe
volume > maximum aspirate volume aspirating and
over range
dispensing action; then
5-90
Hardware System

debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Lyse syringe aspirating and
0337
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Lyse syringe The action time is longer than the
0338
action overtime download time.
Diluent syringe does not finish the
Command is sent early
Diluent syringe previous action when it is requested
0340 while the diluent
is working for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
syringe is still working.
dispensing.
1. Diluent syringe
the diluent syringe
Diluent syringe The detected photocoupler signals
motor moves)
0341 photocoupler are without any change before and
2. Diluent syringe
abnormal after action.
motor error (if the
diluent syringe motor
dose not move)
1. Diluent syringe
the diluent syringe
Diluent syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the motor is at the home
aspirating or syringe should be at the home position)
0342
dispensing position, but the position detected by 2. Diluent syringe
action failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees motor error (if the
diluent syringe motor is
not at the home
position)
Diluent syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the 1. Diluent syringe
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home photocoupler error (if
0343
dispensing position, but the position detected by the diluent syringe
action failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees motor is not at the
5-91
Hardware System
home position)
2. Diluent syringe
motor error (if the
diluent syringe motor is
at the home position)
Diluent syringe Diluent syringe
0344 dispensing the diluent syringe
action motor is at the home
forbidden 1 position)
Diluent syringe Diluent syringe
0345 dispensing the diluent syringe
action motor is not at the
forbidden 2 home position)
Check and make sure
Diluent syringe
over range
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Diluent syringe aspirating and
0347
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Diluent syringe The action time is longer than the
0348
action overtime download time.
Automatic First start the
Start testing the motors before the
testing automatic testing
0390 automatic testing command is
command command, and then
received.
forbidden test the motors.
0401 Reaction bath The reaction bath temp. setup is out Re-set the reaction
5-92
Hardware System
temp. setup out of the MCU pre-set range bath temperature

of limit [30,50]
Optical system The optical system temp. setup is
Re-set the optical
0402 temp. setup out out of the MCU pre-set range
system temperature
of limit [30,50]
1. Check whether the
heater of the reaction
bath is well connected.
Reaction bath Reaction bath temperature is out of
0403 2. Check whether the
temp. error the set range
temperature collection
channel of the reaction
bath is normal.
heater of the optical
system is well
Optical system Optical system temperature is out of connected.
0404
temp. error the set range 2. Check whether the
temperature collection
channel of the optical
system is normal.
Reaction bath
Reset the reaction
temp. Compensation value and ones
0405 bath temp.
compensation complement code dont match
compensation
error
Optical system
Reset the optical
temp. Compensation value and ones
0406 system temp.
compensation complement code dont match
compensation
error
Ambient temp.
Compensation value and ones Reset the ambient
0407 compensation
complement code dont match temp. compensation
error
Reaction bath
Reaction bath temp. compensation Reset the reaction
temp.
0408 out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7 bath temp.
compensation
] compensation
out of limit
Optical system
Optical system temp. compensation Reset the optical
temp.
0409 out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7 system temp.
compensation
] compensation
out of limit
5-93
Hardware System
Ambient temp.
Ambient temp. compensation out of Reset the ambient
040a compensation
the set range [-12.7, 12.7] temp. compensation
out of limit
1. The actual ambient
temperature is out of
the working range.
Ambient temp. Ambient temperature is out of the set 2. Check whether the
0501
abnormal range temperature
transducer and the
measurement circuit
work normally.
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
Controlling whether the pressure
pressure The pressure in the chamber can not pump works normally.
0601 chamber reach the target range within the 2. Check whether the
pressure specified fluidics time. pressure sensor works
failed normally and whether
the pressure detection
signals of the MCU are
normal.
whether the vacuum
Controlling pump and valve 30
The vacuum in the chamber can not
vacuum and 31 works normally.
0602 reach the target range within the
chamber 2. Check whether the
specified fluidics time.
vacuum failed pressure sensor works
normally and whether
normal.
Wait and then send the
Adjusting
The pressure in the chamber is adjusting command
pressure
0603 being controlled. Can not send the again after the
chamber
adjusting command previous pressure
pressure failed
controlling is done.
0604 Adjusting The vacuum in the chamber is being Wait and then send the
5-94
Hardware System
vacuum controlled. Can not send the adjusting command

chamber adjusting command again after the
vacuum failed previous vacuum
controlling is done.
whether the pressure
Pressure
pump works normally.
chamber The pressure in the chamber is out
0605 2. Check whether the
pressure out of of the set range
pressure sensor works
limit
normal.
whether the vacuum
Vacuum pump and valve 30
chamber The vacuum in the chamber is out of and 31 works normally.
0606
vacuum out of the set range 2. Check whether the
limit pressure sensor works
normal.
Pressure
chamber Re-send the control
The pressure control of the pressure
0607 pressure command of positive
chamber is of negative range.
control range range
error
Vacuum
Re-send the control
chamber The vacuum control of the vacuum
0608 command of negative
vacuum control chamber is of positive range
range
range error
FPGA
Wrong download mark. It is not ':'
0701 download mark Re-download
start
error
0702 FPGA The download command is not Re-download
5-95
Hardware System
download defined.
command error
Read all
configuration
0703 Finish reading data
chip content
finished
Data write out The data written for a single time
0704 Re-download
of limit exceeds the maximum of 32 digits
Data write and The data written plus the
0705 head-address head-address exceed the maximum Re-download
over range content of one page (256 bytes).
Send the enabling
0706 Write forbidden Failed to write the configuration chip
command first
0707 Write overtime Write delay exceeds 10ms Re-download
1. Check the EEPROM
circuit for any
missing-soldered
component; check the
EEPROM pin for short
circuit and missolder,
Write-in
0731 Failed to write data into EEPROM etc.
EEPROM error
2. If short circuit is not
found and all
components are
properly soldered, it
indicates the EEPROM
is damaged.
Functional code Communication
The functional code is not defined in
0801 in the control abnormal. Please try
the communication rules.
code error again.
The data length mismatches the Communication
Data length
0802 corresponding data length of the abnormal. Please try
error
current command label again.
Communication
Command label The command label is not defined in
error the communication rules.
again.
Communication
Check code The check code mismatches the
error calculated one
again.
0805 End code error The end code is not the one defined Communication
5-96
Hardware System
in the communication rules. (016) abnormal. Please try

again.
Identity code in Communication
The identity code is not defined in
0806 the control code abnormal. Please try
the communication rules.
error again.
None-sequence
Unable to analyze the Re-send the correct
0817 pack analysis
none-sequence pack command command
error
Troubleshooting special errors
1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure
If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway
for leakage.
If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged
pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.
The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table
for the voltage and pressure.
Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures
Pressure Pressure Relation between sensor

Test point Note
channel range output voltage and pressure
Pressure P represents
2.54kPa TP30
chamber pressure, and
its unit is kPa.
Volt
P = (Vout 1.25) 250
Vacuum -8 represents the
TP31
chamber -40kPa voltage of the
test point, and
its unit is V
2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action
To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are
usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per
the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.
Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the
mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive
components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then
5-97
Hardware System
the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be
replaced.
If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are
jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive
photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in
position.
If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace
the photocoupler.
If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the
error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.
5-98
Hardware System
5.4 Autoloader board
5.4.1 Introduction
The autoloader board is to feed and mix blood samples, as well as scan barcode information
on tubes.
Function
Stepping motor control

Electromagnet control
Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection
Scanner control
Parameter storage
Block diagram
EEPROM
Solenoid
Scanner
Clock
Clock
Sample Mix
EP1C3T14
Mother Board
UART1 1 SMXM
JTAG UART0
4
Step Motor Control
BUS 2 SMZM
Interface
C8051F020 3 SMRM
IRQ
RS422
Sample Feed
Config
4 SFXM
Config
FPGA 5 SFYM
Configuration
Reset Device
Reset
FPGA Reset
Power
Board
Sensor
Status
Sensor
D 5V Digital 5V LDO 3.3V
P 12V
P 24V 3.3V LDO 1.5V
Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the autoloader board
Description
Stepping motor drive

The autoloader board provide the drive control to the following five stepping motors:
X-co motor of the mix mechanism
Z-co motor of the mix mechanism
Mix motor
5-99
Hardware System
X-co loading motor

Y-co feeding motor
The stepping motor drive is a type of bipolar consist-current half-step drive, and there are
position sensors corresponding to the stepping motors to detect their positions.
Electromagnet control
The electromagnet is used to control the process of opening the sample compartment door
(manual close).
Built-in scanner control

The built-in scanner control is used to read barcodes on tubes and tube racks. The autoloader
board controls the built-in scanner through MCU, and the UART communication between MCU
and the built-in scanner through Serial port 1.
Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection

There are 13 position sensor and 1 sensitive switch on the autoloader. The status of the
sensors and switch is detected by FPGA, and MCU will check the status value of the FPGA
internal storage when necessary.
Parameter storage
As there may be manufacture or installation errors, it is necessary to adjust the initial positions
for the X-co motor of the mix mechanism and the mix motor. The adjusted position parameters
will be stored on the autoloader board.
The autoloader is configured with 14 external interfaces, shown as follows.
Table 5-68 External ports on the autoloader board

Interface Function Number of pins Description
FPGA configuration FPGA
J1 10
interface (AS mode) downloading
FPGA debugging interface FPGA
J2 6
(JTAG) debugging
J3 Electromagnet interface 2 /
J4 Reserved 2 Not applied to
J5 Power interface 6 the unit
Mix mechanism sensor
J6 20
interface
Feeding unit sensor
J7 20
interface 1
5-100
Hardware System
Feeding unit sensor

J8 20
interface 2
J10 Reserved 5 /
MCU configuration /
J11 10
interface
J12 Communication interface 4 /
J14 Feeding motor interface 8 /
Control the X-co motor and /
J15 Z-co motor of the mix 8
mechanism
J16 Mix motor interface 4 /
P1 Built-in scanner interface 15 /
Definition of J1:
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).
Table 5-69 Definition of the FPGA configuration interface
Pin Name Pin Name

1 F_DCLK 2 AGND
3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD
5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE
7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC
9 F_ASDO 10 GND
Definition of J3:
J3 is the electromagnet interface.
Table 5-70 Definition of the electromagnet interface

Pin Name Description Mark on Level Note
Wire
1 12V0 Working power supply for the SOLENOID 12V Current:1A
electromagnet
2 solenoid Control signal for the
electromagnet
Definition of J5:
Table 5-71 Definition of the power interface

Pin Name Description
1 D+5V 5V power supply (digital)
2 P+12V 12V power supply (power)
3 P+24V 24V power supply (power)
5 PGND Power ground
6 PGND Power ground
5-101
Hardware System
Definition of J6:
J6 is the mix mechanism sensor interface.
Table 5-72 Definition of the mix mechanism sensor interface

Pin Name Description Mark on Wire Note
1 V_X_START Sending end power signal of
X-co initial position
Transmissive
2 X_START Photocoupler signal of X-co
MX_START sensor
initial position
3 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
5 V_X_END Sending end power signal of
X-co end position
Transmissive
6 X_END Photocoupler signal of X-co
MX_END sensor
end position
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
9 V_Z_START Sending end power signal of
Z-co initial position
Transmissive
10 Z_START Photocoupler signal of Z-co
MZ_START sensor
initial position
11 GND Ground
12 GND Ground
13 V_Z_END Sending end power signal of
Z-co end position
Transmissive
14 Z_END Photocoupler signal of Z-co
MZ_END sensor
end position
15 GND Ground
16 GND Ground
17 V_R_START Sending end power signal of
mix mechanism initial position
Transmissive
18 R_START Photocoupler signal of mix
MR_START sensor
mechanism initial position
19 GND
20 GND
21 V_SYRINGE Sending end power signal of
the sampling position
Transmissive
22 SYRINGE Photocoupler signal of the
Preserved sensor
sampling position
23 GND Ground
24 GND Ground
Definition of J7:
J7 is the feeding sensor interface.
5-102
Hardware System
Table 5-73 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 1

Pin Name Description Mark on Note
Wire
1 V_X_START Sending end power signal of the FX_START
photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
initial position Transmissive
3 GND Ground sensor
5 X_START Receiving end signal of the
initial position
2 V_ X_END Sending end power signal of the FX_END
end position Transmissive
4 GND Ground sensor
6 X_END Receiving end signal of the
end position
7 V_Y_START Sending end power signal of the FY_START
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
Transmissive
9 GND Ground
sensor
11 Y_START Receiving end signal of the
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
8 V_Y_RIGHT Sending end power signal of the right FY_RIGHT
photocoupler for Y-co feeding Transmissive
10 GND Ground sensor
12 Y_RIGHT Receiving end power signal of the right
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
13 V_Y_LEFT Sending end power signal of the left FY_LEFT
photocoupler for Y-co feeding Transmissive
17 Y_LEFT Receiving end signal of the left
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
14 V_UL_START Sending end power signal of the F_UL_START
photocoupler for unloading initial
position Transmissive
18 UL_START Receiving end signal of the
photocoupler for unloading initial
position
19 GND Ground
20 X_READY Sensitive switch for X-co loading ready FX_READY Sensitive
switch
position
Definition of J8:
J8 is the other feeding sensor interface.
5-103
Hardware System
Table 5-74 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 2

Pin Name Description Mark on Note
Wire
1 V_Y_READY Sending end power signal of the Y-co
feeding ready photocoupler
3 GND Ground
5 VCC Receiving end power signal of the Y-co Reserved Reflective
photocoupler
feeding ready photocoupler
7 Y_READY Receiving end signal of the Y-co feeding
ready photocoupler
2 V_UL_FULL Sending end power signal of
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
4 GND Ground F_UL_FULL Reflective
6 VCC Receiving end power signal of photocoupler
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
8 UL_FULL Signal of photocoupler detecting full
unloading platform
9 V_TUBE Sending end power signal of tube
detecting photocoupler
11 GND Ground Reflective
F_TUBE
13 VCC Receiving end power signal of tube photocoupler
detecting photocoupler
15 TUBE Tube detecting photocoupler signal
10 VT_RACK Sending end power signal of sample
volume sensor
12 GND Ground
Reserved Reflective
14 VCC Receiving end power signal of sample
photocoupler
volume sensor
16 RACK Sample volume sensor signal
17 VC_DOOR Sending end signal of sample
compartment door detecting sensor
18 DOOR Receiving end signal of the Reflective
photocoupler for initial unloading DOOR photocoupler
position
19 GND Ground
20 NC Floating
Definition of J11:
J11 is the MCU configuration interface.
5-104
Hardware System
Table 5-75 Definition of the MCU configuration interface

1 VDD Power signal
2 GND Ground
3 GND Ground
4 TCK JTAG clock
5 TMS JTAG mode selection signal
6 TDO JTAG output data signal
7 TDI JTAG input data signal
8 NC Floating
9 GND Ground
10 NC Floating
Definition of J12:
J12 is the communication interface.
Table 5-76 Definition of the communication interface

1 RX+ Serial data receiving end
2 RX- Serial data receiving end
3 TX+ Serial data receiving end
4 TX- Serial data receiving end
Definition of J14:
J14 is the feeding motor interface.
Table 5-77 Definition of the feeding motor interface

Pin Name Description Mark on Wire
1 X_BN Control signal of Phase A, X-co
loading motor SFXM
2 X_B Control signal of Phase AN,
X-co loading motor
3 X_AN Control signal of Phase B, X-co
loading motor
4 X_A Control signal of Phase BN,
X-co loading motor
5 Y_BN Control signal of Phase A, Y-co SFYM
feeding motor
6 Y_B Control signal of Phase AN,
Y-co feeding motor
7 Y_AN Control signal of Phase B, Y-co
feeding motor
8 Y_A Control signal of Phase BN,
Y-co feeding motor
5-105
Hardware System
Definition of J15:
J15 is the control interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix mechanism.
Table 5-78 Definition of the interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix
mechanism
1 X_BN Control signal of Phase BN, X-co
manipulator motor SMXM
2 X_B Control signal of Phase B, X-co
manipulator motor
3 X_AN Control signal of Phase AN, X-co
manipulator motor
4 X_A Control signal of Phase A, X-co
manipulator motor
5 Z_BN Control signal of Phase BN, Z-co
manipulator motor
6 Z_B Control signal of Phase B, Z-co SMZM
manipulator motor
7 Z_AN Control signal of Phase AN, Z-co
manipulator motor
8 Z_A Control signal of Phase A, Z-co
manipulator motor
Definition of J16:
J16 is the mix motor interface.
Table 5-79 Definition of the mix motor interface

1 R_BN Control signal of Phase BN, mix
motor SMRM
2 R_B Control signal of Phase B, mix
motor
3 R_AN Control signal of Phase AN, mix
motor
4 R_A Control signal of Phase A, mix
motor
Definition of P1:
P1 is the built-in scanner interface.
5-106
Hardware System
Table 5-80 Definition of the built-in scanner interface

1 VCC Power signal
2 TXD Serial data receiving end
3 RXD Serial data sending end
4 GND Signal ground
5 NC Floating
6 CTS Sending ready signal
7 OUTPUT1 Scanner out put signal 1
8 \ \
9 Trigger Trigger signal
10 RTS Sending request signal
12 \ \
13 Chassis Shielding ground
15 NC Floating
5-107
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-19 Assembly drawing of the autoloader
5-108
Hardware System
Table 5-81 LED definition
Indicator Description
D3 12V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power supply is
normal
D4 5V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 5V power supply is
normal
D5 3.3V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power supply is
normal
D25 MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when MCU works
normally
D26 FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when FPGA works
normally
Table 5-82 Test point definition
No. Name Pin Note
1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output

signal, FPGA working clock
2 TP2 PIN47 of U2 RD signals of MCU
3 TP3 PIN62 of U2 WR signals of MCU
4 TP4 PIN10 of U2 ALE signals of MCU
5 TP5 PIN28 of U2 FPGA reset signals
6 TP6 PIN5 of J1 FPGA configuration start signal
7 TP7 VCC +5VDC voltage50.25V
8 TP8 12V0 +12VDC voltage (121.2V)
9 TP9 24V0 +24VDC voltage241.2V

10 TP10 VDD +3.3VDC voltage3.30.15V
11 TP11 GND
12 TP12 GND
13 TP13 1V5 +1.5VDC voltage1.50.05V
14 TP15 TUBE Tube detection photocoupler output signal

(0.4V when blocked, and 0.2V unblocked)
15 TP18 PIN3 of X2 24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output
signal, MCU working clock
5-109
Hardware System
16 TP21 PIN12 of U16 Stepping pulse signals of Y-co feeding

motor
17 TP23 PIN12 of U18 Stepping pulse signals of X-co feeding
motor
18 TP24 PIN12 of U22 Stepping pulse signals of Z-co mix motor
19 TP25 PIN12 of U23 Stepping pulse signals of X-co mix motor

20 TP26 PIN12 of U24 Stepping pulse signals of the mix motor
Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.
Purpose
The autoloader board is a key component. You should maintain or replace the board
immediately if any error or damage occurs. Follow the procedures to have the autoloader
board replaced.
Tools

Disassembly

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 panhead screws fixing the
shielding box, and then remove the box;
4. Unplug all the cords and connectors connected to the autoloader control board;
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the five M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the autoloader control board, and then remove the board.
5-110
Hardware System
Figure 5-20 Removing the autoloader control board

1 ---Shielding box 2 --- Panhead screw M4X8
3 --- Autoloader control board 4 ---Cross-headed panhead screw M3X6
Assembly
Assemble the autoloader control board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the autoloader
control board.
2. After ensuring the power supply is cut off, assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, and then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the autoloader control board are in the following status: 1) D3,
D4 and D5 turned on; 2) D25 and D26 flashing. You can also check the indicators in the
self-test screen of the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the autoloader control
board is replaced successfully; otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
5-111
Hardware System
4. Readjust the pincher position as per Section 6.10.2
Error analysis and solutions
Errors related to the autoloader board are identified and handled by the host control software
in the form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the autoloader board can be handled automatically, while some need to be
judged with the help of users or service engineers. When an error is reported, the error No.
and error names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may
appear on the screen as the software help information.
Most errors of the autoloader board are identified by checking the photocoupler information, so
check the photocouplers first in case of errors. To check the photocouplers: first make sure that
the photocouplers are not blocked, and check if the status information of the photocouplers
from the software matches the actual status; hide the photocouplers with lighttight material,
and check if the status information matches the actual status. Inconsistency found in either one
of the two checks indicates invalidation of the photocouplers; otherwise, the error comes from
the board itself.
Typical errors and solutions:
1. Y-co left or right photocoupler error
The cause of such an error: there two photocouplers mounted on the Y-co feeding direction of
the autoloader, which are called the left photocoupler and right photocoupler. In the
autoloading mode, the current tube feeding status is identified based on the number of times
when the level of the photocouplers jumped and the status of the photocouplers. Therefore,
the left and right photocouplers should be related with each other based on certain logical
requirements. If the requirements are not met, the Y-co left photocoupler or right photocoupler
error will be reported.
Troubleshooting measures: 1) check the photocouplers for errors (according to the steps
mentioned above); 2) Check if there is any tube rack blocked along the Y-co feeding line which
occurs when the Y-co feeding motor is not able to push the tube rack due to the tube rack out
of shape or assembly error of the sample transport unit. In such a case, shut down the
analyzer and switch off all the power supplies, and then pull the tube rack along the Y-co
feeding line to identify if the tube rack is out of shape and if the unit is mis-assembled. Replace
with a qualified tube rack if the former one is out of shape; disassemble and repair the sample
transport unit in case of mis-assembly; 3) check if there is any tube rack blocked because
there are tube racks slanting at the unloading area or the unloading platform is not qualified.
Check if the length of the tube rack meets the corresponding requirement and if the metallic
plate of the unloading unit is properly manufactured. 4) Check if the autoloader assembly
(including the buffer plates for the left and right photocouplers, Y-co pallet and Y-co tube rack
backboard) is properly assembled. If there is any mis-assembly, re-adjust the installation
5-112
Hardware System
according to the part related to mechanical structure of the analyzer in this manual, and make
sure the mechanism is out of error.
2. The compartment door cannot be opened
Possible causes for this error: a) compartment door photocoupler error; b) compartment spring
error or door structure error.
Troubleshooting measures: a) check if there is any error with the photocouplers; b) press the
[OPEN] key and check if the electromagnet moves. If the electromagnet acts properly, then
there may be errors with the spring or the mechanical structure of the door and replacement or
adjustment may be necessary.
Error codes and troubleshooting measures
Table 5-83 Troubleshooting errors with the autoloader board
ERR Error name Error feature Recommended action

1. Check if there are EEPROM elements not
welded, EEPROM pin short or mis-welded
EEPROM write Failed to write data to
5A00 2. If there are no such errors, then it is
error EEPROM
identified as an EEPROM error and board
replacement is needed
Current action forbidden
SMXM action Confirm the action status of the mix
5201 while the mix mechanism is
failed mechanism and resend the command
in motion
SMXM should not at the 1. SMXM home position
SMXM action home position, but the photocoupler error: replace the
5202
failed home position photocoupler photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a
is blocked photocoupler error
SMXM should at the home
SMXM action position, but the home
5203
failed position photocoupler is not
blocked
Check the Z-co and R-co photocouplers
SMXM action SMZM or SMRM not at
5204 replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be
failed home position
a photocoupler error
SMXM action SMXM not initialized, action
5205 Initialize the X-co motor
failed forbidden
Check if the predefined action time is
SMXM action
5206 SMXM action overtime reasonable and the actual action speed of the
failed
motor meets the requirement of the design
SMXM should not at the
1. SMXM end position photocoupler error:
SMXM action end position, but the end
5207 replace the photocoupler when it is
failed position photocoupler is
confirmed to be an photocoupler error
blocked
SMXM should at the end
SMXM action position, but the end
5208
blocked
Both the home position and 1. Check the SMXM home position and end
SMXM
end position photocouplers position photocoupler, and replace the
5209 photocoupler
are blocked, then at least photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
error
one of them has an error an photocoupler error
5-113
Hardware System

SMZM action 1. Confirm the action status of the mix
in motion
SMZM should not at the
1. Home position photocoupler error:
SMZM action home position, but the
5402 replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
failed home position photocoupler
to be a photocoupler error
is hide
SMZM should at the home
SMZM action position, but the home
5403
blocked
1. Check the SMXM and SMRM
SMXM not at the end
SMZM action photocouplers, and replace the
5404 position or SMRM not at the
failed photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
home position
an photocoupler error
SMZM action SMZM not initialized, action
5405 Initialize the Z-co motor
failed forbidden
SMZM action
5406 SMZM action overtime reasonable and the actual action speed of the
failed
SMZM should not at the 1. SMZM end position photocoupler error:
SMZM action end position, but the end replace the photocoupler when it is
5407 confirmed to be an photocoupler error
failed position photocoupler is
blocked
SMZM should at the end
SMZM action position, but the end
5408
blocked
Both the home position and 1. Check the SMZM home position and end
SMZM
end position photocouplers position photocoupler, and replace the
5409 photocoupler
are blocked, then at least photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
error
one of them has an error an photocoupler error
SMRM action 1. Confirm the action status of the mix
in motion
SMRM should not at the
1. SMRM home position photocoupler error:
SMRM action home position, but the
5502 replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
failed home position photocoupler
to be a photocoupler error
is blocked
SMRM should at the home
SMRM action position, but the home
5503
blocked
2. Check the SMXM and SMZM
SMRM action SMXM or SMZM not at the photocouplers, and replace the
5504
failed end position photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error
SMRM action SMRM not initialized, action
5505 Initialize the R-co motor
failed forbidden
SMRM action
5506 SMRM action overtime reasonable and the actual action speed of the
failed
SMRM action Not reach the target
5508 Check the SMRM motor and photocouplers
failed position after finish moving
5601 Mix mechanism Action forbidden while the Confirm the action status of the mix
5-114
Hardware System
action failed current mechanism is in mechanism and resend the command

motion
Mix mechanism Number of mixing times out Confirm the number of mixing times and
5604
action failed of predefined range resend the correct command
Mix mechanism Mix mechanism not
5605 Initialize the mix mechanism
action failed initialized
Check the home position photocouplers of the
Mix mechanism At least one of the 3 motors mix motors. and replace the photocoupler
5606
action failed is not at the home position when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler
error
SFXM action Confirm the SFXM action status and resend
5700 SFXM motor in motion
failed the command
1. Self-test if the SFXM home position
SFXM home position photocoupler is broken
SFXM action photocoupler status does
5701 2. When the photocoupler is working
failed not match the position of
the current motor properly, send a SFXM action command to
check if the SFXM motor is normal
Tube rack along Y-co; X-co
SFXM action 1. Remove the tube rack long Y-co, and
5702 motor forbidden to move to
failed then resend the command
the end position
1. Self-test if the SFXM end position
SFXM end position photocoupler is broken;
SFXM action photocoupler status does
5703 2. When the photocoupler is working
failed not match the position of
the current motor properly, send a action command to check
if the SFXM motor is normal
SFXM Both the SFXM end position 1. Check if both the SFXM end position and
5704 photocoupler and home position home position photocouplers are blocked. If
error photocouplers are blocked not, it is the photocoupler at fault.
1 When there is a ready tube rack, if it is
determined that the X-co ready sensitive
Both the SFXM end position switch does not function properly, then
SFXM loading photocoupler signal and the replace the switch
5705
error X-co ready sensitive switch 2 When there is no tube racks, SFXM at
invalid after finish loading end position indicates a SFXM end
position photocoupler error. Replace the
photocoupler.
Check if the defined action time is reasonable
SFXM action SFXM motor action
5706 and the actual action speed of the motor meet
failed overtime
the requirement of the design
FX_READY sensitive
SFXM action switch error: should be Sensitive switch error: replace the sensitive
5708
failed switched off, but is detected switch after confirming the switch is broken
to be switched on
Functional Functional code not defined
5801 control code in the communication Communication error. Please resend
error protocol
Data length differs from that
5802 Data length error of the current command Communication error. Please resend
label
Command label not defined
Command label
5803 in the communication Communication error. Please resend
error
protocol
The check code differs from
5804 Check code error Communication error. Please resend
the calculated check code
5-115
Hardware System
Not the end code defined in

5805 End code error the communication protocol Communication error. Please resend
(016)
Identity control Identity code not defined in
5806 Communication error. Please resend
code error the communication protocol
Non-sequence
Unable to analyze the
5817 pack analysis Resend the correct command
non-sequence pack
error
5-116
Hardware System
5.5 Power board
5.5.1 Introduction
The power board provides six stable power supplies, including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V,
P12V and P24V.
Function
The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board
and module of the BC-5380: D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.
Block diagram
Figure 5-21 Block diagram of the power board
Description
The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz).
5-117
Hardware System
Once the AC power switch is turned on, all the circuits work and the
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted.
Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:
Table 5-84 Output voltage features

Voltage Minimum Nominal Output voltage Voltage Load Noise
current current range adjustment adjustment
rate rate
D5V 2A 5A 4.85/5.25V 1 5% 100mV
+A12V 0mA 1A 11. 5/12. 5V 1 5% 100mV
-A12V 0mA 650mA -11.5/-12.5V 1 5% 100mV
P12V 0.3A 5.5A 11.5/12.5V 1 5% 150mV
P24V 0A 4A 22/27V 1 10% 150mV
AC120V 0mA 60mA 115/145V(RMS) 1 10% /
For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the
period of 60S may occur when working.
The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are
connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading
from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on
the power board is shown below.
5-118
Hardware System
Figure 5-22 Interface layout of the power board
See the following table for the function of each interface.
Table 5-85 Interfaces on the power board

Interface Function Number of pins Number of lands Note
J1 AC input 3 / /
Power supply output
J2 of the fans 6 / /
PCB
Power supply output soldering
A-J12 of the analog part 6 4 output
PCB
soldering
A-J13 AC output 3 2 output
5-119
Hardware System
PCB
A-J35 of the power part 10 10 output
PCB
A-J37 of the digital part 4 4 output
Definition of J1:
Table 5-86 Definition of AC input interface

Pin Definition
1 L, Live wire
2 PG, Earth wire
3 N, Neutral wire
Definition of J2:
Table 5-87 Definition of the fan interface

Pin Definition
P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output
1/3/5 voltage
PGND, connects the negative end of the P12V
2/4/6 output voltage
Definition of AJ12:
Table 5-88 Definition of analog board output

Land Definition Pin
AGND, connects the reference
ground of the analog board output
TP16AGND\TP17AGND voltage 6,7
+A12V,connects the positive end of 5
TP15A12V the +A12V output voltage
-A12V,connects the negative end of 8
TP18A-12V the -A12V output voltage
/ NC 1/2/3/4
Definition of AJ13:
5-120
Hardware System
Table 5-89 Definition of AC output

Land Definition Pin
Two output ends of 1/3
TP19\TP20 AC120
/ NC 2
Definition of AJ35:
Table 5-90 Definition of power supply output

Land Definition Pin
positive end of the P12V
TP1P12V/TP2P12V 4/5
output voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P negative end of the P12V
6/7/8/9/10
GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND output voltage
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24 Positive end of the P24V
1/2/3
V output voltage
Definition of AJ37:
Table 5-91 Definition of D5V output

Land Definition Pin
Positive end of the 5V output
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
voltage 1/2
DGND, negative end of the 3/4
TP7DGND/TP8DGND
5V output voltage
Assembly drawing
5-121
Hardware System
Figure 5-23 Assembly drawing of the power board

The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:
5-122
Hardware System
Table 5-92 Test points on the power board

No. Pin Function Reference
value
1 Q101.2 Q101 switching waveform /
2 Q101.1 Q101 drive waveform /
3 C114.+ PFC output voltage 39020V
4 U101.9 Reference output voltage of the chip 7.5V
5 U101.14 U101 oscillating waveform /
6 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V
7 C204 VDD voltage 121V
8 C223 supply voltage of U201 121V
11 U201.8 U201 reference voltage 5V
13 Q201.3 R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current /
waveform
14 C232.+ D5V output voltage and ripple voltage 50.5V
15 C311.+ U301 supply voltage 121V
20 Q303.3 Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage /
waveform
21 C326.+ 12VB voltage 120.5V
22 C328.+ 130V DC output 115V150V
23 C332.+ A+12V output 120.5V
24 C338.- A-12V output -120.5V
25 U351.15 U351 supply voltage 120.5V
27 U351.11 Q351 drive waveform /
34 C409. U401 supply voltage 121V
5-123
Hardware System

40 C423.+ P24V output voltage, ripple 22~27V
41 C442.+ P12V output voltage, ripple 120.5V
5.5.4 Replacement and Connection
Purpose
Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools

Sharp-nose pliers
Multimeter
Disassembly
Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the
whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):
Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:

3. Remove the data boardsee section 5.2.4 for details

4. Remove the drive boardsee section 5.3.4 for details

5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the
cable fixer and remove the cables.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole.
(M4X8) fixing the power assembly.
8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors
connecting the power switch.
5-124
Hardware System
9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.
Figure 5-24 Removing the power assembly 1

1 ---Mother board 2 --- Power switch
3 --- Ground pole 4 --- Power assembly
5 --- Panhead screw M4X8
Further disassembly of the power assembly

(M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket
from the power assembly.
(M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket.
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug
from the power board, and then remove the fan.
(M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.
5-125
Hardware System
Figure 5-25 removing the power assembly 2

1---Panhead screw M3X8 2 --- Power socket
3---Panhead screw M4X8 4 ---Fan
5---M3 Nut 6---Power board
7 ---fixing board for power board 8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
9---Power board shielding cover 10 ---Power cover
Assembly
Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the
conductive cover of the main unit.
2. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.
5-126
Hardware System
z When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be
sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power
board.
z Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the
main unit.
Causes and recommended action
Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.
5-127
Hardware System
Figure 5-26 Power board troubleshooting flow chart
Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.
5-128
Hardware System
5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board
5.6.1 Introduction
The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count.
Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are
processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming
and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for
the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred
to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal
transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.
Function
Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of
running.
Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure
chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.
Block diagram
Figure 5-27 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board
5-129
Hardware System
Description
WBC count start/end signals

The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred,
level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.
RBC/PLT count start/end signals

The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V
transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the
drive board.
Drive control the volumetric sensor

The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work;
when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.
Vacuum/pressure voltage signals

The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the
voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further
transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1
connector.
The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location
of the connector is shown below.
5-130
Hardware System
Figure 5-28 Interface layout of the volumetric board
Table 5-93 Pin definition

No. Pin Signal description Signal Type
1 P+12V +12V power supply +12 power supply
2 PGND Power ground /
3 DGND Digital ground /
4 POSI_PRESS Pressure voltage signals output Analog
5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum voltage signals output Analog
7 #VM_CTRL Volumetric sensor control signals TTL level
8 RBC_START RBC count start signals TTL level
9 RBC_STOP RBC count stop signals TTL level
10 WBC_START WBC count start signals TTL level
11 WBC_STOP WBC count stop signals TTL level
12 D+5V Digital +5V power supply +5V power supply
5-131
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-29 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top
Figure 5-30 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom
Purpose
The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board
needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board
replaced.
5-132
Hardware System
Tools

Sharp-nosed pliers
Disassembly
1. Shut down the analyzer;

2. Open the right door;
4. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube.
(M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing
the volumetric board.
6. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and
disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.
Figure 5-31 Disassembly of the volumetric board

1---volumetric tube bracket 2---Panhead screw M3X8
3---Volumetric tube 4---Rubber ring
5---Socket cap screws (M3X16) 6---Shielding box of volumetric board
7---Volumetric board
5-133
Hardware System
Assembly
Verification
1. The volumetric board is assembled properly.

2. Start up the analyzer properly.
3. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and
abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.
Table 5-94 Troubleshooting the volumetric board

Error Recommended
No. Error name Error feature Causes Probability
type action
Improper cable
connection with Reconnect the
the mother board cable or
Medium
or disconnection change a new
The voltage of caused by a cable
the P+12V test broken cable
+12V power System
1 point is not Improper power
supply error error
equal to supply of the See
12V0.6V. main unit or troubleshooting
Improper +12V Low of the drive
power supply board and
sent by the power board
mother board
L2 is damaged
The voltage of
(or rosin jointed)
the P+5V test Replace or
+5V power Board or something is
2 point is not Low re-solder the
supply error error wrong (rosin
equal to components
jointed) with the
5V0.25V.
C20 and C13.
5-134
Hardware System
Improper cable
Medium
caused by a cable
broken cable
Something is
wrong with the See No.2 in the
Low
+5V power table
Comparator The TP6
Board supply.
3 reference power output voltage
error Something is
supply wrong 2.5V0.25V Replace or
wrong with the
Low re-solder the
U8 chip or it is
U8
rosin jointed.
Improper cable
Medium
Voltage of the caused by a cable
Control signal System
4 VM_CTRL broken cable
error error
signal 0.8V Control signals
See
sent by the drive
troubleshooting
board through Low
of the drive
the mother board
board
is wrong
Control signal See No.4 in the
Medium
error table
Control circuit
Constant current error (Q1 or U2 is
Standard
source of the Board wrong or rosin
5 voltage (TP5) Replace or
volumetric error jointed; resistors
2.5V0.25V Medium re-solder the
sensor error R10, R11, R18,
components
R23, R25 and
R24 is wrong or
rosin jointed)
5-135
Hardware System
Adjust VWST,
VWSP, VRST
and VRSP to
VWST, VWSP, make the
VRST or VRSP voltage of the
Medium
are not adjusted point WT, WP,
well. RT and RP
equals to
2.7V0.1V
Voltage of the Voltage of the
respectively.
point WT, WP, RT Board point WT, WP,
6 Volumetric
and RP is not the error RT and RP
sensor U15, U21, Replace or
expected value 2.7V0.1V
U16 or U17 is Low re-solder the
wrong (or rosin components
jointed).
Constant current
source of the See No.5 in the
Medium
volumetric table
sensor error
+5V power See No.2 in the
Low
supply error table
D1, D2, D3 or D4 Re-solder or
is damaged (or Low change the
rosin jointed) component
Indicators D1,
D2, D3 and D4 Low
supply error table
are off when
Something is
fluid flows or
Indicator Board wrong with the See No.3 in the
7 are still on Low
abnormal error TP6 standard table
when no fluid
power supply
flows through
the volumetric Voltage of the
tube point WT, WP, RT See No.6 in the
Medium
and RP table
2.7V0.1V
Constant current Board Standard +12V power See No.1 in the

8 Low
source error of error voltage TP10 supply error table
5-136
Hardware System
the vacuum 2.5V0.25V C14, R37, U11, Re-solder or

sensor R47 or U4 is change the
Medium
damaged (or component
rosin jointed).
Low
Constant current supply error table
Standard
source error of Board C21, R36, R35, Re-solder or
9 voltage TP7
the pressure error U3 or U10 is change the
2.5V0.25V Medium
sensor damaged (or component
rosin jointed).
Low
Pressure/vacuum supply error table
Standard
unit +2.5V Board R39, C11, R38,
10 voltage TP9 Re-solder or
reference power error R48, VR9, U9 or
2.5V0.25V Medium change the
supply error U6 is damaged
component
(or rosin jointed)
Adjust VR9,
making the
VR9 is not
Medium relative voltage
adjusted well.
of the TP9 to
The relative TP8
Pressure/vacuum
Board voltage of the 1.2500.002V
11 1.25V voltage
error TP9 to the TP8 Pressure/vacuum
error
1.2500.002V 2.5V reference See No.10 in
Medium
power supply the table
error
Replace or
U6 is damaged
Medium re-solder the
or rosin jointed
components
Pressure output Board When the input +12V power See No.1 in the
12 Low
voltage abnormal error pressure is supply error table
0HPa or Constant current
450HPa, the source error of See No.9 in the
Medium
output voltage the pressure table
of the point PP sensor
is not equal to 1.25V voltage See No.11 in
Medium
1.2500.002V error the table
5-137
Hardware System
or Adjust PPZ to
2.2500.002V. make the
voltage of the
PP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is 0.
PPZ or PPG is
Medium Then, adjust
not adjusted well
PPG to make
the voltage of
the PP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is
450HPa.
U12, U14, R34,
R44, R45, R46, Re-solder or
R50, R52, C10 or Medium change the
C23 is damaged component
(or rosin jointed)
Vacuum output Board When the input +12V power See No.1 in the
13 Low
voltage abnormal error pressure is supply error table
0HPa or Constant current
-450HPa, the source error of See No.8 in the
Medium
output voltage the vacuum table
of the point NP sensor
is not equal to 1.25V voltage See No.11 in
Medium
1.2500.002V error the table
5-138
Hardware System
or Adjust NPZ to
0.2500.002V. make the
voltage of the
NP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is 0.
NPZ or NPG is
Medium Then, adjust
not adjusted well
NPG to make
the voltage of
the NP is
0.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is
-450HPa.
U12, U13, R33,
R40, R41, R42, Re-solder or
R43, R51, C7 or Medium change the
C22 is damaged component
(or rosin jointed)
5-139
Hardware System
5.7 Liquid-level detecting board
5.7.1 Introduction
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH
and cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level
detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by
current-voltage transferring, level-transforming and de-bouncing. Finally, the
drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.
Function
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and
cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.
Block diagram
LEO
I-V
I LEO(I) Sensor Level transform
transform
tube
LEO
I-V
II LEO(II) Sensor Level transform
transform
tube
Mother
J1 Board
I-V
LH tube LH Sensor Level transform
transform
I-V
CL tube CL Sensor Level transform
transform
Liquid Level Board
Figure 5-32 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board
5-140
Hardware System
Description
For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle,
so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.
Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)

The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the
I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then
sent to the drive board.
Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents

The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work;
when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.
The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board.
The location of the connector is shown below.
J1
Figure 5-33 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board
The definition of pins is shown in the table below.
5-141
Hardware System
Table 5-95 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board

No. Pin Signal description Signal Type
1 D+5V Digital +5V power supply +5V power supply
2 LIQ1 LEO(I) status output signals TTL level
3 LIQ2 LEO(II) status output signals TTL level
4 LIQ3 LH status output signals TTL level
5 LIQ4 Cleanser status output signals TTL level
6 / / /
7 #D_CTRL Drive control signals of detecting sensor TTL level
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-34 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top
Figure 5-35 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom
5-142
Hardware System
5.7.3 Replacement and Connection
Purpose
Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the
operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.
Tools

Disassembly
Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the board from the main unit:
2. Open the left door.
4. Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.
(M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.
6. Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its
back, and then remove the board.
5-143
Hardware System
Figure 5-36 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw 2---Liquid-level detecting board shielding
M3x6 (with washer) cover
3---Panhead screw M3X8 4---Liquid-level detecting board
Further disassembly of the drive board

M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.
2. Remove the 2 pipe clamps.
Figure 5-37 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8 2---Liquid-level detecting board
3---Pipe clamp
5-144
Hardware System
Assembly
Verification
1. The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.

2. The tubing is connected properly.
3. Start up the analyzer properly. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If No LEO(I)
(/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser) or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.
Table 5-96 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board
Error Error Recommended

No. Error name Causes Probability
type features action
Improper cable
connection with
Reconnect the
the mother board
Medium cable or change a
or disconnection
new cable
caused by a
broken cable
Improper power
The voltage
supply of the main See
of the +5V
+5V power System unit or Improper troubleshooting of
1 test point is Low
supply error error +5V power supply the drive board
not equal to
sent by the and power board
5V0.25V.
mother board
L2 is damaged (or
rosin jointed) or
Replace or
something is
Low re-solder the
wrong (rosin
components
jointed) with the
C7 and C11.
Comparator The TP1 Something is
Board See No.1 in the
2 reference output wrong with the Low
error table
power voltage +5V power supply.
5-145
Hardware System
supply 2.5V0.25V Something is

wrong wrong with the
Replace or
chip U9 or R10 or Low
re-solder the U9
they are rosin
jointed.
Improper cable
connection with
Reconnect the
the mother board
Medium cable or change a
Voltage of or disconnection
new cable
the caused by a
Control System
3 D_CTRL broken cable
signal error error
signal Control signals
0.8V sent by the drive See
board through the Low troubleshooting of
mother board is the drive board
wrong
Control signal See No.3 in the
Medium
error table
Voltage to Control circuit
Abnormal ground of error (Q1, U1, U2,
driving of collector U3 or U4 are
Board
4 the electrode of wrong or rosin Replace or
error
detecting Q1 is not jointed; resistors Medium re-solder the
sensor between R1, R2, R9, R40, components
4.4V-5.25V. R41, R42 or R43
are wrong or rosin
jointed).
The voltage Adjust VL1, VL2,
of point voltage of VL3 and VL4 to
VLL1, point VLL1, make the voltage
VLL1, VVL2,
VVL2, Board VVL2, of the point VVL1,
5 VVL3 or VVL4 are Medium
VVL3 and error VVL3 and VVL2, VVL3 and
not adjusted well.
VVL4 is not VVL4 VVL4 equals to
the 2.2V0.1V 2.2V0.1V
expected respectively.
value. Detecting sensors
Replace or
U1, U2, U3 or U4
Low re-solder the
are wrong (or
components
rosin jointed).
5-146
Hardware System
Abnormal driving
See No.4 in the
of the detecting Medium
table
sensor
+5V power supply See No.2 in the
Low
error table
LED1, LED2,
Re-solder or
LED3 or LED4 are
Low change the
damaged (or rosin
component
jointed)
+5V power supply See No.1 in the
Low
Indicators error table
LED1, Something is
LED2, wrong with the See No.2 in the
Low
LED3 and TP1 standard table
LED4 are power supply
still on voltage of point
Indicator Board
6 when the VLL1, VVL2, See No.5 in the
abnormal error Medium
tube is VVL3 and VVL4 table
filled with 2.2V0.1V
fluid or are U7, R15, R19,
off when no R32, R17, R13,
fluid exists R14, R18, R21,
in the tube. R5, R11, R30, Re-solder or
R22, R12, R31, Medium change the
R4, R23, R25, component
R26, R27 or R28
are damaged (or
rosin jointed).
5-147
Hardware System
5.8 Laser Control Board
5.8.1 Introduction
The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.
Function
Power conditioning
Laser drive current monitoring
Constant-laser power controlling
Block diagram
Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the laser control board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 100mV.
Laser drive current monitoring

The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.
Constant-laser power controlling

The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output
5-148
Hardware System
power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a
closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The
power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.
The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser, as the figure shows.
Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the laser control board
Table 5-97 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)

PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level
1 AVSS -12V Analog power I -12V
supply
2 AGND Analog ground
3 LASER Monitoring voltage of No greater than 5V
laser drive current
4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V
#CONTROL Control signals produced I/O Low level: 0.8V
by standard voltage High level: OC door
of 5V
6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V
5-149
Hardware System
Table 5-98 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)

No. Name Note Direction Level
I/O
1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser diode O -
2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode I -
3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver I -
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board
Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the
voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat
VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test
point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases.
Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 3.9-4.1V (adjustable as per the situation; it is the voltage
difference relative to A-12V), then the voltage of TPILD is 0.8-2.0V (it is also the voltage
difference relative to A-12V; note: the laser works normally).
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.
5-150
Hardware System
z Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power
supply is cut off.
z Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.
See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-99Test points of the laser control board
Test Signal under Function

No.
point test
1 A+12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board
2 A-12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the
3 D5V VCC
upper photocoupler.
Digital \
4 AGND ground on
board
The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1 chip
5 TPVREF VREF
(relative to A-12V).
Double voltage to ground of the rheostat
6 TP2VREF 2VREF sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in
direct ratio.
The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21
7 TPIPD PDA caused by the feedback current signals from the
photoelectrical receiving part of the laser.
The working current signals of the diode part of the
laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode
8 TPILD LASER part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting
whether the laser is working under the expected
status.
5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly

See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.
5-151
Hardware System
Table 5-100 Troubleshooting the laser control board
Error Recommended action

No. Error Possible Causes
Features
Improperly connected Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with change a new cable
the mother board
Check and make sure the
Improper power sent
power sent by the mother
The voltage of to the laser control
board and the data board
the A+12V test board
+12V power is proper.
1 point exceeds
supply error Something is wrong Check the circuit on the
the range of
with the power board.
12V0.6V
control circuit on the
board. Grounding
short-circuits. The
power is lower or
higher.
Something is wrong
The voltage of with the power
the A-12V test control circuit on the
-12V power Check the circuit on the
2 point exceeds board. Grounding
supply error board.
the range of short-circuits. The
-12V0.6V power is lower or
higher.
The voltage of
the mother board
the D5V test
5V power Improper power is Check and make sure the
3 point exceeds
supply error sent to the laser power sent by the mother
the range of
control board by the board and the data board
5V0.25V
data board or mother is proper.
board.
The voltage of
the mother board
Control signal the signal
4 Improper control Check and make sure the
error #CONTROL
signals sent by the signals sent by the mother
0.8V
data board or mother board and the data board
board are proper.
5-152
Hardware System
The voltage of First ensure the -12V Re-solder or change the

TPVREF power works U1
Reference
5 2.5V0.1V normally. Then, the
voltage error
(regards -12V chip U1 is rosin
as reference) jointed or damaged.
First ensure the Re-solder or change the
TPVREF is normal. components
Then, the slide
Laser The voltage of rheostat is rosin
intensity TP2VREF is jointed or damaged.
6 control abnormal Or, something is
reference (should be wrong with the
voltage error 3.9V-4.1V) soldering of the
operation amplifier
U2 and its
peripherals.
Laser diode Re-connect or change the
damaged or connection cable, or
connected improperly change the laser diode
Laser The voltage of 5V voltage error See No.3 in the table
intensity TPILD Control signals error See No.4 in the table and
7 monitoring exceeds the or succeeding control check the succeeding
signals TPILD range of circuit error circuit.
output error 0.8-2V The operation Re-solder or change the
amplifier U3 and its components
peripherals are rosin
jointed or damaged
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.
5-153
Hardware System
5.9 Pre-amplification board
5.9.1 Introduction
The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered
lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and
amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal
share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.
Function
Power conditioning
Optical-electrical converting
Signal conditioning
Block diagram
Figure 5-41 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 50mV.
Optical-electrical converting
The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals
by the photodiode.
5-154
Hardware System
Signal conditioning
The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the
succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input
required signals are obtained.
The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e.
the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother
board). The layout of the board is shown below.
Figure 5-42 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board

PIN Definition Note Direction Level
I/O
2 FS/SS Pre-amplification board output voltage signals 1V
3 SHELL Shielding ground - 0
4 AVSS A-12V analog power supply I -12V5%
6 AVCC A+12V analog power supply I 12V5%
The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
5-155
Hardware System
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser.
Figure 5-43 Interface layout of the laser control board

PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level
1 AVSS -12V Analog power supply I -12V
3 LASER Monitoring voltage of 5V
laser drive current
4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V
#CONTRO Control signals produced I/O Low level: 0.8V
L by standard voltage High level: OC
door of 5V
6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V
Table 5-103 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)

No. Name Note Direction I/O Level
1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser diode O -
2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode I -
3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver I -
5-156
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
(a) Top
(b) Bottom
Figure 5-44 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board
5-157
Hardware System

No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the
board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-104 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board
Test Signal under Function

No.
point test
Digital \
1 AGND ground on
board
2 +12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board
3 -12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board
4 OUT OUT FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the
5 D5V VCC
upper photocoupler.
5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly

See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
Table 5-105 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board
No. Error Error Features Possible Causes Recommended action

Improper cable connection
with the mother board or the Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
The voltage of the
Check whether the proper
12V +12V test point Improper 12V power sent by
power supply is sent by
power exceeds the range of the data board or mother
1 the mother board or the
supply 120.6V; or the board
data board
error ripple noise is
Rosin joint or damage
greater than 50mV.
happens to the +12V test
Re-solder or change the
point relating inductor L1 or
component
the capacitors C24, C27, C20
and C23.
5-158
Hardware System
Improper cable connection

with the mother board or the Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
The voltage of the
Check whether the proper
-12V -12V test point Improper -12V power sent by
power supply is sent by
power exceeds the range of the data board or mother
2 the mother board or the
supply -120.6V; or the board
data board
error ripple noise is
Rosin joint or damage
greater than 50mV.
happens to the -12V test point
Re-solder or change the
relating inductor L2 or the
component
capacitors C22, C26, C25 and
C21.
The FS board is installed in
SS output signals
the location of the SS board Change the board
too weak (supposing
by mistake.
it is caused only by
R4, R5 or R6 resistance error, Re-solder or change the
the circuit problems)
rosin jointed or damaged component
FS output signals The SS board is installed in
too strong the location of the FS board Change the board
(supposing it is by mistake.
caused only by the R4, R5 or R6 resistance error, Re-solder or change the
Channel
circuit problems) rosin jointed or damaged component
output
3 The
value The photodiode D1 or R1 is Re-solder or change the
pre-amplification rosin jointed or damaged. component
error
board (FF/SS)
output signals are The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed Re-solder or change the
too weak to be or damaged. component
detected.
Something is wrong
Check whether the relating
with the band width
resistors and capacitors R4, Re-solder or change the
of the
R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are component
pre-amplification
rosin jointed or damaged.
board (FF/SS).
5-159
Hardware System
5.10 Indicator Board
5.10.1 Introduction
The indicator board realizes the functions of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.
Function
Analyzer working status indicating

Buzzer alarming
Description
Analyzer working status indicating

The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When
the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator
turns red.
Buzzer alarming
The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-106 Interface definition of the indicator board

Direction
PIN Name Note Level
I/O
1 VCC Power supply - +5V
4 FAULT Error indicator (red) I TTL
Working indicator
5 WORK I TTL
(green)
7 BUZ Buzzer I TTL
8 GND Ground - 0
5-160
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-45 Assembly drawing of the indicator board
Purpose
Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools

Disassembly

2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the
indicator board, and then remove the board.
5-161
Hardware System
Figure 5-46 Disassemble the indicator board and the key board
1---Key board 2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)
3---Front cover 4--- Indicator board
5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)
Assembly
Assemble the indicator board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the
process from startup self-test to ready, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they
work normally, the replacement is successful.
Table 5-107 Troubleshooting the indicator board

No. Error Causes and recommended action
1 Indicator doesn't work If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking
the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused
by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection and the system works normally, then, the
diode of the indicator might be damaged.
2 The buzzer is mute when If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking
system alarming. the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused
by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a
hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged.
5-162
Hardware System
5.11 Key Board
5.11.1 Introduction
The key board enables the operator to interact with the main unit through the [RUN] and
[OPEN] keys during the autoloading/manual loading process.
Function
[RUN] key
[OPEN] key
Description
Use the [RUN] key

The operator can press the [RUN] key to start autoloading.
Use the [OPEN] key
The operator can press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment door.
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-108 Interface definition of the key board

Direction
PIN Name Note Level
I/O
2 COUNT_KEY [RUN] key - TTL
3 INSERT_KEY [OPEN] key I TTL
4 GND Ground I 0
5-163
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-47 Assembly drawing of the key board
Purpose
Damaged key board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools

Disassembly

2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 tapping screws (PT3X8) fixing the
key board, and then remove the board.
5-164
Hardware System
Figure 5-48 Disassemble the key board and the indicator board
1---Key board 2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)
3---Front cover 4--- Indicator board
5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)
Assembly
Assemble the key board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the key board. Wait for the PC
interface to show ready, and then press the [OPEN] key in the front cover. If the sample
compartment door opens, then the key board is successfully replaced.
As the structure of the key board is quite simple, it seldom has errors. If there is no response
after pressing the keys, connect the 2 and 4 pins, as well as the 3 and 4 pins of the J1 interface.
If the circuit is closed after pressing one of the keys, the key board is out of error and you
should check other components for errors; if the circuit is open, the key is not working properly.
5-165
6 Maintenance
6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding
Settings
No. Type Maintenance Settings to be reset
Replace the drive board Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
1 by software
Replace the autoloader board

2 Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software
Boards Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
Replace the data board
3 count-related settings
Replace the power board

4 Re-conduct the safety test
5 Replace the volumetric board Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Remove the sample feeding sample feeding assembly
Mechanism assembly from the analyzer and Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
then re-assemble it to the sample compartment and the autoloading
6 position by software.
1. Manually adjust the position of the sample
Remove the sample compartment compartment on the sample feeding assembly.
assembly from the analyzer and 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
then re-assemble it assembly to the sample compartment by
7 software.
Disassemble and assemble the Re-assemble the sample feeding assembly as
8 sample feeding assembly per the steps specified in Section 6.8
1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
Disassemble and assemble the assembly to the DIFF bath.
DIFF bath assembly or have it 2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
upgraded changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
9 necessary.
Remove the DIFF bath assembly
from the analyzer and then Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
10 re-assemble it to the DIFF bath by software
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Remove the mix assembly from
mix assembly.
the analyzer and then
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
re-assemble it
11 software.
1. Locate the clipper to the right position by
Disassemble and assemble the clamp.
clipper or have it upgraded 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
12 software.
Disassemble and assemble the Re-assemble the mix assembly as per the
13 mix assembly specified process.
Replace and
mix assembly.
disassemble/assemble the front
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
cover
14 software.
6-1
Maintenance

Replace and sample feeding assembly.
disassemble/assemble the 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
bottom cover assembly to the sample compartment and the
15 autoloading position by software.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the aperture
16 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the bath
Baths
1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at
Replace the volumetric tube the setting screen.
19 Replace HGB Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.
The vacuum created in the
20 sequence is changed Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Sequence
Sample results are changed
21 greatly Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.
6-2
Maintenance
6.2 General
You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.3 6.7 . After repairing, follow the verification
procedures to verify the analyzers status.
6-3
Maintenance
6.3 Disassembling the Panels
6.3.1 Removing the left door
Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the left door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord

2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock
tongue 90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
Figure 6-1 Removing the left door
Installation
Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
6-4
Maintenance
6.3.2 Removing the right door
Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the right door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.

2. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue
90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
z Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door;
otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.
Figure 6-2 Removing the right door
6-5
Maintenance
Installation
Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.3 Removing the top cover
Purpose
To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure
to remove the top cover.
Tools
Removal

2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws.
3. Pull out the top cover from back upward.
6-6
Maintenance
Figure 6-3 Removing top cover

1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 top cover
Installation
Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.4 Removing the back panel
Purpose
To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the back panel.
Tools
6-7
Maintenance
Removal

2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws
used for fixing the back panel of power supply
3. Pull the back panel outward.
Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply

1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 back panel of power supply
Installation
Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.5 Removing the front door
Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system inside the front cover, follow this procedure to remove the front
door.
Tools
6-8
Maintenance
Removal

2. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.3 .
3. Turn the handspike handle 90 (clockwise and counterclockwise) to make it slide into the
slot in the front board, and the front door will be pushed open by the handspike.
4. Lift the front door upwards.
Figure 6-5 Removing the front door

1 Handspike handle 2 Handspike
3 Back panel 4 Mix mechanism
5 Front panel 6 Front door
6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly
Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system, syringes and sample transport unit inside the front cover, follow
this procedure to remove the front cover.
Tools

6-9
Maintenance
Removal

2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 .
3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.2 .
4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 .
5. Make sure there are no tubes or tube racks left at the sample transport area (if there are,
remove them).
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws
on the left, right and top side of the front cover.
7. Pull the front cover outward by 50 - 80 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from
the indicator board.
8. Remove the front cover forward.
Figure 6-6 Removing the front cover assembly

1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 top cover
3 Key board 4 indicator light board
5 right door 6 M4X8 countersunk head screw
7 front cover assembly 8 left door
Installation
Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-10
Maintenance
6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes

(Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)
Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the left door

1 valve assembly I 2 M4X12 small panhead screws
3 plain washer 3 4 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw
(with lock washer)
5 diluent syringe 6 lyse syringe
7 M4X8 small panhead screws 8 pressure chamber
9 air pump 10valve assembly II
6-11
Maintenance
Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the right door

1 valve 2 M3X8 small panhead screw
3 M4X12 small panhead screw 4 vacuum chamber
5 waste pump assembly 6 valve assembly III
7 pinch valve
6-12
Maintenance
Figure 6-9 Removing fluidic system inside the front door

1 valve 2 pressure-leakage valve
3 M3X8 small panhead screw 4 sheath syringe
5 injection syringe 6 sampling syringe
7 plain washer 3 8 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw
(with lock washer)
6.4.1 Replacing valves
Purpose
In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.
Tools

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.

To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)
6-13
Maintenance
1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly..
5. Take out valve assembly.
To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)
1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
the valve on the right side, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ); to remove the
valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section 6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9 (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding
tube).
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the
valve out.
Figure 6-10 Valve assembly I
6-14
Maintenance
Figure 6-11 Valve assembly II
Figure 6-12 Valve assembly III

1 valve 2 M3X8 small panhead screw
3 valve bracket
Installation
Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check the fluidic connections.

2. Power on and verify the installation.
6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber
Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.
6-15
Maintenance
Tools

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.

To remove the pressure chamber:
1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws.
4. Pull the pressure chamber out.
To disassemble the pressure chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate;
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap,
then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
Figure 6-13 Removing pressure chamber

1M3X12 cross-headed panhead 2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)
3 O ring 48.7x1.8 4 O ring 9.5 x 1.8
5 airproof screw 6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber
6-16
Maintenance
Installation
Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.

2. Check the fluidic connections..
6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber
Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.
Tools

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.

To remove the vacuum chamber:
1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws.
4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.
To disassemble the vacuum chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate.
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end
cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
6-17
Maintenance
Figure 6-14 Removing vacuum chamber

1M3X12 cross-headed panhead 2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)
3 O ring (48.7x1.8) 4 O ring (9.5x1.8)
5 airproof screw 6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber
Installation
Install the vacuum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification

2. Check the reagent connections.
6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly
Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.
Tools

2 mm hexagon wrench
6-18
Maintenance
2.5 mm hexagon wrench

150 mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.
To remove the syringe assembly

1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 );
to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front
cover assembly (as per section 6.3.5 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-9.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws
fixing syringe and 3 plain washer. .
4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the
motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber
washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)
To disassemble the syringe:

1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syringe
a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the
assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul
and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 ).
c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed
screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass
syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe (as per Figure 6-15).
z Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the
glue is dry.
6-19
Maintenance
Figure 6-15 Removing glass syringe unit

1 M4X8 special screw 2 glass syringe unit
3 washer
d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on
the electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to
remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch
(Figure 6-16).
6-20
Maintenance
Figure 6-16 Removing syringe assembly

1MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM Linear 2 syringe slider
rolling guide
3 M3X8 socket head screw 4 43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor
5 M3X6 cross-headed panhead 6 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor
screw
7 syringe photocoupler bracket 8 M3X8 cross-headed panhead screw
9 Syringe protection shield 10 M4X8 retaining screw
e. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the syringe protection shield. Use
2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe slider.
Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and remove
the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head
screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor (Figure
6-21
Maintenance
6-16);
z Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and
apply some glue to the threads.
f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear
rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off
its guide way.)
2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being
the 10ml Mindray syringe.)
a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per
section 6.3.1 )
b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover
assembly (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 )
c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver and flat-headed screwdriver to remove the 10ml syringe presser the two
tailor-made M3X12 socket head screws, and remove the Mindray syringe unit. (Figure
6-17)
Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 10ml syringe presser 2 M3X12 socket head screw
3 Mindray syringe unit 4 M4X8 tailor-made screws
6-22
Maintenance
d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The
ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction.
(Figure 6-18)
Figure 6-18 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 10ml ceramic plug 2 PT3X10 cross-headed panhead
screw
3 10ml syringe flange 4 10ml syringe lock ring
5 O ring 15X3 6 10ml syringe body
z Before replacing the lock ring, make sure relative parts (especially the
operation surface of the ceramic plug) are clean, and then insert the plug
into the flange, lock ring and O ring in turn and make it fixed to the syringe
body.
Installation
Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification

2. Check wire connections.
3. Check reagent connections.
6-23
Maintenance
6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump
Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.
Tools

100 mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the waste pump:
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump;
4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump;
on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.
To disassemble the waste pump:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the pump.
2. Remove the waste pump
3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers.
4. Remove the pump mounting plate.
5. Remove three shock pads via hand.
6-24
Maintenance
Figure 6-19 Removing waste pump

1 M3X8 small panhead screws 2 rotary pump
3 pump mounting plate 4 8-32UNC-2B nut
5 GB93 4 washer 6 shock pad
7 bracket
Installation
Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification

2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump.
3. Check the reagent connections.
6-25
Maintenance
6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly
Purpose
In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding
assembly.
Tools

Removal
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ).
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer
screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover.
6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs
to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring,
until the wire is drawn to the bath.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath
shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-21)
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on
bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-21)
9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the
bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the WBC bath
assembly or the RBC bath assembly.
6-26
Maintenance
Figure 6-20 Removing signal lines of bath

1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead 2 top cover of data board shielding box
washer screw
3 data board
Figure 6-21 Removing bath assembly

1 shielding plate 2 WBC bath
3 bath presser 4 M3X8 small panhead screw
5 RBC bath 6 shield cover
7 isolation chamber clamp 8 isolation chamber
6-27
Maintenance
Installation
Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not.
6-28
Maintenance
6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting

Position
6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe
Purpose
To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

Replace parts according to requirements:
Probe wipe
open vial sample probe / piercing needle
metal wipe clip
sample probe presser
Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer if it is running.

2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.
Removal
1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-22)
a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe.
b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the
figure below, and remove the wipe clip.
c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow
d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.
6-29
Maintenance
Figure 6-22 Removing wipe

1 pipe clamp 2 presser under the guiding rod
3 probe wipe 4 wipe clip
2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-23)
a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe.
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small
panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.
c. Get out the probe from sideward.
6-30
Maintenance
Figure 6-23 Removing sample probe

1 slider 2 sample probe
3 presser 4 M3X8 small panhead screw
z When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under
guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise
caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.
Installation
To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse
order.
6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor
Purpose
To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.
6-31
Maintenance
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver107X75

Sensor module on motor position3003-21-34925
Photocoupler fixer
Preparation

Removal
1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-24)

a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure).
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor.
c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.
Figure 6-24 Removing vertical optical sensor

1 M3x6 cross-headed screw 2 sensor module on motor position
3 bracket
2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-25)

a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler
6-32
Maintenance
presser to be replaced
b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position)
from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the
corresponding hole.
c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler
presser and the sensor module on motor position.
d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module.
Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.
Figure 6-25 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position
Installation
To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.
6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module
Purpose
To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.
Tools

wire cutter
Sampling module
6-33
Maintenance
Preparation

3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as
possible.
4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 )
5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.
Removal
1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire
cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module.
2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the
connector from the motor directly.
3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left
by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5380 has four connectors, and
BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly.
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing
the joint.
5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing
the sampling module.
6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module
from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line.
7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding
holes, then hold out the sampling module.
6-34
Maintenance
Figure 6-26 Removing the sampling module

1 M3X8 small panhead screw 2 link
3 spacer 4 sampling module
5 M4X12 panhead screw
z Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If

necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to
avoid potential biologic pollution.
6-35
Maintenance
Installation
To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.
6-36
Maintenance
6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction

Bath
Purpose
To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.
Tools

wire cutter
DIFF reaction bath
Preparation

3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
Removal
1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the
DIFF bath assembly.
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing
the DIFF bath assembly.
3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe
connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them.
4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.
6-37
Maintenance
Figure 6-27 Removing DIFF bath assembly

1 DIFF bath assembly 2 M4X8 small panhead screw
Installation
To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.
Remember to readjust the position of the sample probe over the DIFF bath as per Step 11 to
14 in Section 6.10.1 .
6-38
Maintenance
6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)

6.8.1 Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample
compartment assembly
Purpose
To remove or replace the closed-tube sample compartment, follow steps in this section.
Tools

1.5mm hexagonal wrench
sharp-nose pliers or small flat-headed screwdriver
Damp gear
PHOTOELEC switch
Gear
Electromagnet
Preparation

3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the sample compartment assembly:
1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )
2. Unplug the connector of the photoelectric switch on the sample compartment assembly
and the cable connector of the electromagnet.
3. Mark the position of the sample compartment assembly on the autoloader board (make
sure the sample compartment assembly can be installed back to the right position).
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 3 M4X8 small panhead screws, and
then move out the closed-tube sample compartment assembly in the direction as indicated
by the arrowhead in Figure 6-28.
6-39
Maintenance
Figure 6-28 Removing the sample compartment assembly

1 Autoloader 2 Sample compartment assembly
3 M4X8 small panhead screw
To disassembly the closed-tube sample compartment assembly:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws, and then remove the electromagnet assembly; remove the two M3X6
cross-headed panhead screws in the electromagnet assembly, and then remove the
electromagnet body; remove the E ring to take out the spring, as shown in Figure 6-29
6-40
Maintenance
Figure 6-29 Removing the electromagnet assembly

1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 2 Electromagnet assembly
3 E ring 4 Spring
5 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 6 Electromagnet body
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screw fixing the photocouplers, and then remove the photocouplers, as shown in Figure
6-30
Figure 6-30 Removing the photocouplers

1 PHOTOELEC switch 2 M4X12 cross-headed panhead screw
6-41
Maintenance
3. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X5 set screws, and then remove
the gear; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws fixing the damp gear, and then remove the damp gear, as shown in
Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Removing the gear and the damp gear

1 M3X5 set screw 2 Gear
3 Damp gear 4 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
4. Use the sharp-nose pliers to remove the spring from either of the two fixing ends, as
shown in Figure 6-32.
5. Use the sharp-nose pliers or the small flat-headed screwdriver to remove either of the two
D2 E rings on the shaft, and loosen the two M3X5 set screws in the tube holder
compartment fixing the shaft. Then take out the shaft and remove the tube holder
compartment body and the helical torsion springs.
z During installation, make sure the M3X5 set screws are fixed in the same
level of the notches in the shaft, and one of the screws should be plunged
into the cone-shaped hole.
6-42
Maintenance
Figure 6-32 Removing the helical torsion springs

1 D2 E ring 2 Shaft
3 M3X5 set screw 4 Tube holder compartment
5 Pulling spring 6 Helical torsion springs
6. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X5 set screw fixing the shaft, and then
you can take out the shaft, deep groove ball bearing, wheel, bush and gasket in turn, as
z During installation, the two bearings should be put into the wheel (the
bearings are supposed to be cling to the inner of the wheel) until their ends
reaches those of the wheel; the set screws should be fixed in the level of the
notches in the shaft.
6-43
Maintenance
Figure 6-33 Disassembling the shaft assembly

1 Shaft 2 3x6x2.5 deep groove ball bearing
3 Wheel 4 Bush
5 Gasket 6 M3X5 set screw
Installation
To replace the sample compartment assembly with a new one, repeat the first removal
procedure (step 1 to 4) in the reverse order. During installation, take into account the
following items:
1. One side of the sample compartment assembly should be set close to the positioning step
raised on the bottom board (autoloader bottom board)
2. Be sure to install the assembly back to the position marked in disassembly.
To replace components like the photocouplers, electromagnet, damp gear or springs,
repeat the second procedure above in the reverse order. During installation, take into
account the following items:
1. The tube holder compartment body should be put right in the center
2. Always install the damp gear after the gear is installed
3. Turn the core of the electromagnet 360 and make sure there is no interference
4. Move the guiding axis of the electromagnet with you hand and make sure the sample
compartment can turn properly. Push the compartment body back to the initial position and
make sure it can be locked up.
6-44
Maintenance
6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the

sample transport unit
Purpose
To remove or replace the detection switches (detecting the sample transport unit for proper
loading of tube rack and empty/full status of the unloader), follow the steps in this section.
Tools

Sensitive switch
PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
Preparation

Removal

2. Unplug the cable connector corresponding to the switch to be replaced
3. Use the 101 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M2X8 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sensitive switch detecting the proper loading of tube racks, and then
remove the sensitive switch.
z During installation, remember to check the orientation of the sensitive

switch and make necessary adjustment. To make adjustment, move the tube
rack manually to where the switch locates until it cannot be moved any
more; the clicking sound made by the sensitive switch indicates proper
installation (move the tube rack repeatedly to identify).
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M2X8 small panhead screws fixing
the switches detecting the empty/full status of the unloader, and then remove the switch,
as shown in Figure 6-34.
6-45
Maintenance
z Install the switch as level as possible.
Figure 6-34 Disassembling the switches of the sample transport assembly

1 M3X8 small panhead screw 2 PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
3 M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw 4 Sensitive switch
Installation
To replace the switch with a new one, repeat Step 1 to 4 above in the reverse order.
6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit
Purpose
As there may be errors with the sample transport unit (especially the switches and driving
units) during operation, you need to replace these components according to the steps in this
section.
Tools
6-46
Maintenance

3mm hexagonal wrench
Preparation

Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the sample transport unit.
Remove the sample transport unit:
2. Remove the shielding box from the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the sample transport assembly and the autoloader control board
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sample transport unit, and then remove the sample transport unit, as
Note: You should readjust the position of the sample transport unit during installation. See
Chapter 3 for how to make adjustment.
6-47
Maintenance
Figure 6-35 Disassembling the sample transport unit (1)

1 Sample transport unit 2 M4X12 panhead screw
Disassemble the sample transport assembly:

1. See Figure 6-36 for components of the sample transport compartment
6-48
Maintenance

1 Loading unit (forth-and-back) 2 Sample transport frame
3 Closed-tube sample compartment assembly 4 Riser unit
5 Unloader unit 6 Platform unit
7 Loading unit (left-and-right) 8 Backboard
2. Unplug the connector of the stationary barcode scanner; use the 107 screwdriver to
unscrew the four M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the stationary barcode scanner and
its bracket on the backboard unit, and then remove the stationary barcode scanner and its
bracket, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove other units on the backboard like the
tube detecting photocouplers and the tube rack locating plate as per Figure 6-37
z During installation, make sure the back of the tube locating block and that of
the tube rack locating plate are at the same plane; adjust the distance
between the tube rack block and the tube rack to be around 0.2mm.
6-49
Maintenance

1 Stationary barcode scanner 2 Barcode scanner bracket
3 Backboard bracket 4 Sensor fixing board
5 M3X8 small panhead screw 6 Tube rack locating plate
7 Rubber baffle plate 8 Rubber baffle plate presser
9 M2X4 cross-headed panhead screw 10PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
11Tube locating block
fixing the unloader unit and remove the connector of the photoelectric sensor on the
unloader unit, and then remove the unloader unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the unloader unit as per Figure 6-38
6-50
Maintenance

1 M3X8 small panhead screw 2 M4X10 cross-headed panhead screw
3 GP1A05A photoelectric sensor 4 Unloader pulling spring
5 Sensory plate 6 Top cover of the gear holder
7 Gear shaft 8 Short rack
9 Gear holder 10Long rack
11Bottom cover of the gear holder 12M3X8 cross-headed countersunk screw
13Unloader bracket
fixing the spring presser, and then remove the spring presser, as shown in Figure 6-36 and
Figure 6-39
6-51
Maintenance

1 Riser unit 2 Large plain washer GB96 3
3 Spring presser 4 M3X8 small panhead screw
5 Shaft sleeve 6 Sensory plate 3
fixing the front supporting board, and then remove the front supporting board, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40
8. Unplug the connectors of the sensitive switch and the PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective) on
the platform unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M3X8 small
panhead screws fixing the platform unit, and then remove the platform unit, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40
6-52
Maintenance

1 M3X8 small panhead screw 2 Sample transport platform
3 M4X8 panhead screw 4 Front supporting board
9. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the three photoelectric sensor in the
left-and-right loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
left-and-right loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-41
10. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench and the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver to remove the left-and-right loading unit as per Figure 6-41
6-53
Maintenance

1 Stepping motor PK244M-01B 2 M3X5 hexagon set screw
3 Washer 4 Driven belt shaft
5 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4 6 E ring GB/T896-86.4
7 Guiding rail supporting block 8 Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A
9 Guiding rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM 10M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
11Belt presser 12Left-and-right loading slid plate
13M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 14Shaft sleeve
15M3X12 cross-headed panhead 16Pallet
screw (with washer)
17Plain washer GB97.1 3 18M4X10 cross-head panhead screw
19Synchronous belt 20M3X8 small panhead screw
21Left-and-right loader bracket 22Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4
11. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the two photoelectric sensor in the
forth-and-back loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
forth-and-back loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-42
12. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench, 101 cross-headed
screwdriver and the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the forth-and-back loading
unit as per Figure 6-42
6-54
Maintenance

1 Driven belt shaft 2 Washer
3 Synchronous belt TBN160MXL025 4 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4
5 Stepping motor PK244M-01B 6 M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw
7 Large plain washer GB96 3 8 Right pusher
9 M3X5 hexagon countersunk head 10Belt presser
set screw
11M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 12Pulling spring
13M3X12 cross-headed panhead 14Shaft sleeve 2
screw (with washer)
15Left pusher 16Forth-and-back loading pusher board
17Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A 18M3X8 small panhead screw
19M4X10 cross-headed panhead 20Guiding rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM
screw
21M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw 22Forth-and-back loader bracket
23E ring GB/T896-86.4 24Synchronous belt TBN160MXL02
(two positioning plate)
6-55
Maintenance
Installation
Repeat the removal steps in the reverse order to install.

Take into account the following items during installation and adjustment:
Requirements for installing the forth-and-back loading unit:
Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.
Requirements for installing the left-and-right loading unit:
Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.
Requirements for installing the unloader unit:
Make sure the two racks can move freely with little resistance after installation. If the resistance
is large, repair is necessary; otherwise, the unit may not be able to restore the initial position.
See the initial positions of the short rack in Figure 6-43 with one tooth hanging over the end.
Figure 6-43 Initial position of the short rack

Requirements for installing the sample transport unit:
While installing the assembled sample transport unit to the main unit, readjust tbe sample
proble position as per Step 1 to 10 in Section 6.10.1
6-56
Maintenance
Verification
1. Readjust the position of the sample probe as per Step 10 to 14 in Section 6.10.1 .
2. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
3. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
6-57
Maintenance
6.9 Mix mechanism
Purpose
As there may be errors with the mix mechanism during operation, you need to replace the
mix mechanism according to the steps in this section.
Tools

3mm hexagonal wrench
BC-5380 mix mechanism
Preparation

Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the mix mechanism.
Remove the mix mechanism:
1. Remove the shielding box on the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the mix mechanism and the autoloader control board
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 panhead screws, and
then remove the mix mechanism, as shown in Figure 6-44.
6-58
Maintenance
Figure 6-44 Removing the mix mechanism

1 Mix mechanism 2 M4X8 small panhead screw
Disassemble the mix mechanism:

1. Unfasten the plastic cable tie fixing the components and pull out the plugs from the five
photocouplers and three motors to the cable, and then remove the cable
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the small motor protection cover, and then remove the cover, as shown in
Figure 6-45
3. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the three M3X8 cheese head hexagon
screws connecting the rotation and X-co motion unit and the Z-co motion unit, and then
remove the two units, as shown in Figure 6-45
6-59
Maintenance
Figure 6-45 Disassembling the mix mechanism

1 Rotation and X-co motion unit 2 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
3 Small motor protection cover 4M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
5 Z-co motion unit
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the protection cover, and then remove the protection cover, as shown in
6-60
Maintenance
Figure 6-46
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the two photocouplers on the 43 motor installation board, and then remove
the motor installation board and the elements on the board (draw out the motor shaft from
the motor nut), as shown in Figure 6-46
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the motor nut, and then remove the nut, as shown in Figure 6-46
7. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the connection block, and then remove the block, as shown in Figure 6-46
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the Z-co sensory plate, and then remove the two Z-co photocoupler sensory
plates, as shown in Figure 6-46
9. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the five M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail, as
shown in Figure 6-46
10. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling
6-61
Maintenance
1 Protection cover 2 Photocouplers

3 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 4Connecting block
5 Motor nut 6 Z-co sensory plate
7 Linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM 8 Bracket
9 M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 10 M3X8 small panhead screw
11 43 motor installation board 12 Sensor installation bracket
screws fixing the sensor installation bracket, as shown in Figure 6-47
12. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X8 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear stepping motor E43H4Q, and then remove the linear stepping motor
E43H4Q, four M3 large washer and 8 O rings, as shown in Figure 6-47

1 Linear stepping motor E43H4Q 2 O ring
3 43 motor installation board 4M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screw
5 Sensor installation bracket 6 M3 large washer
7 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw 8 Sleeve
13. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the six M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, and
then remove the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, as
14. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor, and then remove the stepping motor E28H41, as
15. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 cheese head hexagon fixing
the 28 motor installation board, and then remove the installation board, as shown in Figure
6-48
6-62
Maintenance
16. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the connecting board, and then remove the connecting board
17. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R75Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling

1 Linear motor E28H41 2 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
3 28 motor installation board 4M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead
screw
5 Slider connecting board 6 linear guiding rail
MGN9C1R75Z0CM
7 Connecting board 8 M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
9 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 10 X-co sensory plate
11 Photocouplers 12 X-co sensor installation board
19. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the presser,
6-63
Maintenance
and then remove the presser, as shown in Figure 6-49

20. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the rotation
photocoupler plate, and then remove the rotation photocoupler plate, as shown in Figure
6-49
21. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the swing
arm and use the 2mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M4X8 set screw fixing the swing
arm, and then remove the swing arm
screws fixing the spring tube pincher, and them remove the M3 large washer and the
spring tube pincher, as shown in Figure 6-49
23. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X10 cheese head hexagon
screws fixing the rotation stepping motor, and then remove the four M3 large washer, the
rotation stepping motor and the synchronous belt, as shown in Figure 6-49
24. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four set screws fixing the two small
pulleys, and then remove the pulleys, as shown in Figure 6-49
25. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 screws fixing the bearing
holder, and then remove the bearing holder, pulley shaft and the two deep groove ball
bearings, as shown in Figure 6-49
26. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor E28H41 nut, and then remove the linear stepping
motor E28H41 nut, as shown in Figure 6-49
27. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
fixing the rotation sensor bracket, and then remove the rotation sensor bracket and the
photocouplers
6-64
Maintenance
1 Presser 2 Spring tube pincher

3 Rubber washer 4M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
5 Swing arm 6 M4X8 set screw
7 M3X5 set screw 8 Small pulley
9 Pulley shaft 10 Rotation motor installation board
11 Rotation sensor bracket and 12 Bearing holder
photocouplers
13 Deep groove ball bearing 14 Rotation sensory plate
15 Rotation stepping motor 16 Linear stepping motor E28H41 nut
17 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 18 M3 large washer
19 M3X10 cheese head hexagon screw 20 Synchronous belt
Installation
Perform the steps above in the reverse order to install.

During installation or position adjustment, take into consideration the following items:
1. Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before
installation
2. Make sure the motion parts can move properly
3. Keep the synchronous belt fully tightened
4. Adjust the initial position of the pincher (for forth-and-back movement, left-and-right
movement, and rotation) while installing the assembled unit to the main unit. See Section
6.10.2 for how to make adjustment.
6-65
Maintenance
6.10 Adjustment
6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position
1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and open the sample compartment manually. Put the
sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample compartment and close the
compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-50. Loosen the three screws on the sample
transport unit shown in Figure 6-51, Figure 6-52 and Figure 6-53. Move the sample probe
assembly and sample transport unit horizontally and enable the sample probe to aim at the
central hole in the locating fixture, and then fix the three screws.
Figure 6-50 Sample transport unit
Figure 6-51 Left screw Figure 6-52 middle screw Figure 6-53 Right screw
2. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the PC software on the main unit and on the PC. Then, enter the user name
service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the
pop-up box, and then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message
box will pop up asking you whether to Ignore fluidic initialization?. Click Yes to skip
the initialization.
3. Press the [OPEN] key on the front cover, and the sample compartment will be opened
automatically. Put the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample
compartment, as shown in Figure 6-54.
6-66
Maintenance
Figure 6-54 Placing the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture

4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen, as shown in Figure
6-55.
Figure 6-55 Clicking Debug

5. Click CT Piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move to the
position above the sample compartment automatically, as shown in Figure 6-56.
6-67
Maintenance
Click Start
Figure 6-56 Starting CT piercing position adjustment

6. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the position of the sample probe,
making the probe inserted into the slot, and then click Up to move out the probe, as
6-68
Maintenance
Click Stop
Click Forward,
Backward,
Up and Down
Figure 6-57 Adjusting the CT piercing position using the software

7. Put a piece of paper on the locating fixture and click Down to make the sample probe
touch the paper. Then click Stop to save the position of the probe over the sample
compartment. Open the sample compartment manually to remove the sample
in-compartment locating fixture and close the compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-58.
Figure 6-58 Placing a piece of paper on the fixture

8. Put the sample probe autoloading locating fixture at the autoloading position of the sample
6-69
Maintenance
transport assembly, as shown in Figure 6-59
Figure 6-59 Placing the locating fixture at the piercing position

9. Click AL piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move onto the
autoloading position, as shown in Figure 6-60
Click Start
Figure 6-60 Starting AL piercing position adjustment

10. Click Forward, Backward, Down and Up to adjust the position of the sample probe,
6-70
Maintenance
making the probe inserted into the slot of the locating fixture. Click Up and put a paper on
the AL positioning fixture, and then click Down until the sample probe reaches the paper,
as shown in Figure 6-61. Click Stop to save the autoloading position of the sample probe,
and then remove the sample probe AL positioning fixture, as shown in Figure 6-62.
Click Stop
Click Forward,
Backward,
Down and Up
Figure 6-61 Adjusting the sample probe AL piercing position using the software
Figure 6-62 Sample probe reaching the paper

11. Put the sample probe DIFF bath up position locating fixture in the aperture of the DIFF
6-71
Maintenance
bath, as shown in Figure 6-63.
Figure 6-63 Placing the DIFF bath up position locating fixture

12. Click DIFF Bath Up Position, and then click Start to move the sample probe onto the
DIFF bath, as shown in Figure 6-64.
Click Start
Figure 6-64 Starting DIFF bath position adjustment

13. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the sample probe, making it
inserts in the position in front of the round slot. Click Stop to save the position of the
sample probe, and then remove the fixture, as shown in Figure 6-65.
6-72
Maintenance
Click Forward,
Backward, Up
Click Stop and Down
Click Ok
Figure 6-65 Adjusting the sample probe DIFF bath up position using the software
14. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen.
6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position

1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and put the tube rack at the piercing position of the
sample transport unit, making the recess of the tube rack lap over the presser, as shown in
Figure 6-66, Figure 6-67 and Figure 6-68.
Recess
Figure 6-66 The recess of the tube rack
6-73
Maintenance
Presser
Figure 6-67 The presser of the sample transport unit
The presser laps over the

recess of the tube rack
Figure 6-68 Placing the tube rack

2. Move the pincher to the tube grabbing position and push upwards. Then put the tube
locating fixture into the pincher and make the pincher upright. Move the pincher
downwards slowly, and check if the tube locating fixture can be inserted to the tube rack
properly. If not, remove the four set screws and the left-and-right mixing assembly to insert
the tube locating fixture to the tube rack. Secure the screws after adjustment, as shown in
Figure 6-69.
Four screws
Tube locating
fixture
Figure 6-69 Adjusting the manipulator position manually

3. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the main unit and the PC software. Then, enter the user name service and the
6-74
Maintenance
password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the pop-up box, and
then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message box will pop up
asking you whether to skip the initialization. Click Yes to skip the initialization
4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen
5. Click Manipulator and Start in turn, and the pincher will move onto the tube grabbing
position, as shown in Figure 6-70.
Click Start
Figure 6-70 Starting manipulator position adjustment

6. Put the tube rack at the piercing position of the sample transport unit, and then put the
tube locating fixture into the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-71
Figure 6-71 Placing the pincher locating fixture
7. Click Left and Right to adjust the pincher to be upright, and then click Forward,
6-75
Maintenance
Backward, Up and Down to make the tube locating fixture able to insert in the hole of
the AL piercing position locating fixture. Click Up and remove the two fixtures, as shown
in Figure 6-72 and Figure 6-73.
Click Left,
Right Forward,
Backward, Up
and Down
Click Stop
Click Ok
Figure 6-72 Adjusting the pincher position using the software
Figure 6-73 The hole in the piercing position locating fixture

8. Click Stop to save the position of the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-72.
9. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen, as shown in Figure 6-72.
6-76
7 Optical System
7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting
Purpose
To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.
Tools
Antistatic gloves
Hexagon wrench
Cross-headed screwdriver
Flat-headed screwdriver
Horologic driver
Duke (4K-07) 7m standard particles
Oscilloscope or oscillometer
Removal and installation
Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover
of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as
Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component
installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be
repeated in the following procedures.
7-1
Optical System
Screws
Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system
7-2
Optical System
7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System

Assemblies
The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell
assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly,
and rear light detector assembly.
z Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.
z Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before
removing boards.
z Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is

disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.
7.2.1 Laser driver board
The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of
the laser.
1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver
board.
2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support.
3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing
screws.
7-3
Optical System
Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation

1fixing screws of laser driver board 2fixing screws of laser driver board
support
7.2.2 Front light assembly

The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install
the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing.
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater,
temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light
assembly and remove the assembly.
4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing
the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then
remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.
7-4
Optical System
Figure 7-3 Front light assembly

1Laser assembly 3Cylindrical mirror assembly
2Front guide assembly
5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly
or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of
the over temperature protection switch.
7.2.3 Flow cell assembly
The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle
tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to
create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and
disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the
outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take
out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.
7-5
Optical System
Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube

1Sample charging tube 2Sheath charing tube
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell
assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows.
4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.
Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure

1Rectifier assembly 3Detecting assembly
2O ring 4Hexagon screw
5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.
7-6
Optical System
7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly

The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and
allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light
collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of
the rear light collimator assembly.
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to
remove the lens assembly.
Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly

1Diaphragm lens assembly 2Rear light guide assembly
4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form
a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm
lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly

The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low
angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for
the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly.

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter
3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed
7-7
Optical System
screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the
boards.
4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.
5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of
the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.
Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly

1Base of spectroscope 4Clamping ring
2Side board 5Washer
3Top board 6Beam-splitting prism
7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly

The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered
light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a
LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.
LAS assembly
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and
remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle
diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the
two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.
7-8
Optical System
Figure 7-8 LAS assembly

1Low angle diaphragm 2Rear light focus lens assembly
4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as
needed.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
MAS assembly
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then
remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and
then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws
on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.
Figure 7-9 MAS assembly

1High angle diaphragm 2Rear light focus lens assembly
7-9
Optical System
4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly

The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical
signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a
forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Forward low angle PD assembly

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly
and then remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and
remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly

1Shielding box 3PD
2Low angle pre-amplification board 4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the
forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Forward middle low angle PD assembly
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD
7-10
Optical System
assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then
remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly

1Shielding box 3PD
2High angle pre-amplification board 4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install
the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Pre-amplification board
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and
remove the shielding box from the PD assembly.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD
assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly.
Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the
replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.
7-11
Optical System
7.3 Adjustment
Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been
disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly
has been disassembled.
The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse
adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same
optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine
tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the
signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the
signal generated meets the adjustment standard.
7.3.1 Coarse adjustment

According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light
assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light
collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.
Front light assembly adjustment
Purpose:
Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far
field spot is in the vertical direction.
Principle:
The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the
incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at
the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the
optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the
optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser
assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator
assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the
surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly
turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as
Figure 7-13 shows.
7-12
Optical System
Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation
Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment
7-13
Optical System
Flow cell adjustment
Purpose:
Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.
Principle:
That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers
the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the
optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell
surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to
harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.
Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment
Rear light collimator assembly adjustment
Rear light horizontal position adjustment

Purpose:
To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.
Principle:
The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting
direction.
Procedure:
1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes
through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical.
Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.
7-14
Optical System
Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly
2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the
beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center
of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light
collimator assembly.
Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator
assembly is finished
z The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.
Rear light collection assembly adjustment
LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
7-15
Optical System
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly
diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Procedure:
1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly
diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical
horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17).
2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in
Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm

MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS
assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is
finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure
the fixing screw.
Rear light detector assembly adjustment
Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment

Purpose:
To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.
Procedure:
7-16
Optical System
Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the
center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the
aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly

1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating 2Low angle beam spot
veiling glare
Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment

Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward
low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by
the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
veiling glare
The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above,
each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following
describes the fine tuning of the optical system.
7-17
Optical System
7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning
Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell
Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the
optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square
aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path,
as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment

1Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob
Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light
After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct
light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is
the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the
diaphragm is right in this position.
Visual check method:

Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two
sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in
Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot
distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.
7-18
Optical System
Figure 7-21 Visual check method

1Beam spot 3Drawing line
2Inner aperture of the flow cell 4High angle diaphragm
DC background method:
Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or
the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and
select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC
background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.
After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in
Figure 7-22).
Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light

1Lock screw of the diaphragm
against direct light
7.3.3 Fine tuning

The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it
detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly
consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that
the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered
7-19
Optical System
light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the
forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the
rear light collimator assembly.
Before the particle adjustment, at the Main Menu Setup Gain screen, set the
values of SS and FS to be 100.
Adjustment of front light assembly axial position
Purpose:
Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.
Procedure:
1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the
voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the
voltage is 4V.
2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD
assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,
time 500ns/div and AC coupling.
3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7m standard
particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the
centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.
4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the
oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown
in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is
obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as
shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.
7-20
Optical System
Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position

1Front light axial adjustment knob 2laser axial adjustment lock screws
Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system
Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and
generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance
until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of
the guide assembly support is about 4mm.
Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly
Purpose:
To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed
collection angles.
7-21
Optical System
Procedure:
1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD
assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the
oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div
and AC coupling.
2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the
rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.
Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach
the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.
3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv10mv. If not,
adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the
CH1 are 190mv10mv.
4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the
adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal
peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.
Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position
Purpose:
To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.
Procedure:
1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the
oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.
2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the
oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.
7-22
Optical System
Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position

1Horizontal adjusting knob of the
flow cell
3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure
7-26:
Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams
Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the default screen is
the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click Calculate to obtain the particle scattergram
parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following
standards:
MAS 0.1max width < 15.21
LAS 0.1max width < 6.5
4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the
flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the
optical system.
7-23
Optical System
Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell

1Lock screws of the flow cell
Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.
7.3.4 Gain setup

After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup
consists of two steps:
Calibration using calibrators
At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the calibrator
in the CT-WB-CBC+DIFF mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit, please
clean the flow cell or do a background check).
After the test, Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the
default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click Calculate to obtain the
calibrator scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.
7-24
Optical System
Figure 7-28 Optical system output calibrator signal

Enter into the Peak target boxes:
LAS low angle gravity center target
MAS high angle gravity center target
Calculate the gains, enter the gains into the corresponding boxes of the
MainSetupGain screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.
After the gain setup, retest the calibrator and 7m standard particles to verify the gain and
check if the following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of
the calibrator should be within 0.57 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 0.63
from the target. For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92);
low angel width 6.50; high angel width 15.21. Otherwise, continue calibrating until the
following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be within 1.51 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 2.4 from the target.
For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator should be
18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angel
width 6.50; high angel width 15.21.
Sample verification
After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood
samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images
shown in Figure 7-29:
7-25
Optical System
Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample
If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different
from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic
system work normally.
7-26
Optical System
7.4 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation

The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram
is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn
smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell
position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.
Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram
Settlement:
Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the
laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of
front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the
peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment
screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller,
then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment
screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of
standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.
7.4.2 Flow cell clog

This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes
the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as
Figure 7-31 shows.
7-27
Optical System
Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram

Settlement:
Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.
7.4.3 Dirty flow cell

It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to
the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the
inner wall of flow cell.
Settlement:
Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in
the same direction
Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.
7-28
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Error code and information
Table 8-1 Error code and information
Error Code Error Name Error Code Error Name
0x01000100 Valve output failed 0x01003011 High pressure

0x01000101 Valve No. out of range 0x01003020 WBC volumetric tube filter
clog
0x01000201 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003021 RBC volumetric tube filter
motor failed to move to target clog
position
0x01000202 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003030 DIFF reaction bath temp.
motor failed to return to home error
position after initialization
0x01000203 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003031 Temperature out of working
motor failed to leave home range
position after initialization
0x01000204 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003032 Temperature out of operating
horizontal motor to target range
position failed
0x01000205 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003033 Optical system temp. error
horizontal motor to home
position failed
0x01000206 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003050 FS blank voltage abnormal
horizontal motor to leave
home position failed
0x01000207 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003060 HGB blank voltage abnormal
motor adjustment error
0x01000208 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003061 Laser diode current abnormal
motor adjusting steps out of
limit
0x01000209 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003062 HGB channel error
motor adjusting end position
error
0x01000211 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003070 Diluent expired
8-1
Troubleshooting
motor failed to move to target

position
0x01000212 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003071 HGB Lyse expired
motor failed to initialize to
upper position
0x01000213 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003072 LEO(I) Lyse expired
motor failed to initialize to
lower position
0x01000214 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003073 LEO(II) Lyse expired
vertical motor to target
position failed
0x01000215 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003074 Cleanser expired
vertical motor to upper
position failed
0x01000216 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01003080 No Diluent
vertical motor to leave upper
position failed
0x01000217 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003081 No LH lyse
motor adjustment error
0x01000218 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003082 No LEO(I) lyse
motor adjusting steps out of
limit
0x01000219 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003083 No LEO(II) lyse
motor adjusting end position
error
0x01000220 Sampling assembly is working 0x01003084 No Cleanser
0x01000221 Cannot adjust sampling 0x01003085 Waste is full
assembly
0x01000222 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003090 Emptying WBC bath failed
motor action overtime
0x01000223 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01003091 Emptying RBC bath failed
motor action forbidden
0x01000224 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x010030A0 Constant current source 55V
motor does not match current voltage abnormal
position
0x01000225 Sampling assembly vertical 0x010030A1 +12V analogue voltage
motor action overtime abnormal
0x01000226 Sampling assembly vertical 0x010030A2 -12V analogue voltage
motor action forbidden abnormal
8-2
Troubleshooting
0x01000227 Sampling assembly vertical 0x010030A3 Drive board 24V voltage

motor mismatch current abnormal
position
motor failed to pierce to lower abnormal
position
motor failed to pierce to upper abnormal
position
0x01000230 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x010030B0 Data board DDR abnormal
motor photocoupler error
0x01000231 Sampling assembly RBC bath 0x010030B1 Data board FLEXBUS
photocoupler error abnormal
0x01000232 Sampling assembly WBC 0x010030B2 Data board FLASH abnormal
bath photocoupler error
0x01000233 Sampling assembly DIFF bath 0x010030B3 Data board AD7908
photocoupler error. abnormal
0x01000234 Sample assembly vertical 0x010030B4 Data board AD7928
motor photocoupler error abnormal
0x01000235 Sampling assembly upper 0x010030C0 Drive board communication
photocoupler error error
0x01000236 Sampling assembly lower 0x010030D0 Side door open
photocoupler error
0x01000300 Sampling syringe busy 0x010030D1 Optical assembly cover open
0x01000301 Sampling syringe 0x010030D2 Sample compartment door
photocoupler abnormal open
0x01000302 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01004200 Software protocol resolution
return to home position after
action
0x01000303 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01004201 Response overtime
leave home position after
action
0x01000304 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01004202 Heartbeat disconnected
return to home position before
action
0x01000305 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01004401 DIFF data FIFO overflow
leave home position before
action
0x01000306 Sample syringe aspirate 0x01004402 DIFF data RAM overflow
8-3
Troubleshooting
volume over range

0x01000307 Sample syringe dispense 0x01004403 WBC data FIFO overflow
volume over range
0x01000308 Sample syringe action 0x01004404 WBC data RAM overflow
overtime
0x01000310 Sample injection syringe busy 0x01004405 RBC data FIFO overflow
0x01000311 Sample injection syringe 0x01004406 RBC data RAM overflow
photocoupler abnormal
0x01000312 Sample injection syringe 0x01004407 PLT data FIFO overflow
failed to return to home
position after action
0x01000313 Sample injection syringe 0x01004408 PLT data RAM overflow
failed to leave home position
after action
0x01000314 Sample injection syringe 0x01004409 HGB data FIFO overflow
failed to return to home
position before action
0x01000315 Sample injection syringe 0x0100440a HGB data RAM overflow
failed to leave home position
before action
0x01000316 Sample injection syringe 0x01004600 Analyzer communication
aspirate volume over range disconnected
0x01000317 Sample injection syringe 0x01004601 Analyzer network
dispense volume over range configuration fail
0x01000318 Sample injection syringe 0x01005200 Loading motor busy
action overtime
0x01000320 Sheath fluid syringe busy 0x01005201 Manipulator pinch motor busy
0x01000321 Sheath fluid syringe 0x01005202 Manipulator pinch motor
photocoupler abnormal failed to leave home position
0x01000322 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01005203 Manipulator pinch motor
return to home position after failed to return to home
action position
leave home position after action forbidden
action
return to home position before initialization failed
action
8-4
Troubleshooting
leave home position before action overtime

action
0x01000326 Sheath fluid syringe aspirate 0x01005207 Manipulator pinch motor
volume out of range failed to leave end position
0x01000327 Sheath fluid syringe dispense 0x01005208 Manipulator pinch motor
volume out of range failed to return to end position
0x01000328 Sheath fluid syringe action 0x01005400 Manipulator pinch motor
overtime initialization forbidden
0x01000330 Lyse syringe busy 0x01005401 Manipulator elevation motor
busy
0x01000331 Lyse syringe photocoupler 0x01005402 Manipulator elevation motor
abnormal failed to leave home position
0x01000332 Lyse syringe failed to return to 0x01005403 Manipulator elevation motor
home position after action failed to return to home
position
0x01000333 Lyse syringe failed to leave 0x01005404 Manipulator elevation motor
home position after action action forbidden
0x01000334 Lyse syringe failed to return to 0x01005405 Manipulator elevation motor
home position before action initialization failed
0x01000335 Lyse syringe failed to leave 0x01005406 Manipulator elevation motor
home position before action action overtime
0x01000336 Lyse syringe aspirate volume 0x01005407 Manipulator elevation motor
out of range failed to leave end position
0x01000337 Lyse syringe dispense volume 0x01005408 Manipulator elevation motor
out of range failed to return to end position
0x01000338 Lyse syringe action overtime 0x01005500 Manipulator elevation motor
forbid mix motor action
0x01000340 Diluent syringe busy 0x01005501 Mix motor busy
0x01000341 Diluent syringe photocoupler 0x01005502 Mix motor failed to leave
abnormal home position
0x01000342 Diluent syringe failed to return 0x01005503 Mix motor failed to return to
to home position after action home position
0x01000343 Diluent syringe failed to leave 0x01005504 Mix motor action forbidden
home position after action
0x01000344 Diluent syringe failed to return 0x01005505 Mix motor initialization failed
to home position before action
0x01000345 Diluent syringe failed to leave 0x01005506 Mix motor action overtime
home position before action
0x01000346 Diluent syringe aspirate 0x01005507 Mix motor failed to leave end
8-5
Troubleshooting
volume out of range position

0x01000347 Diluent syringe dispense 0x01005508 Mix motor failed to return to
volume out of range home position
0x01000348 Diluent syringe action 0x01005600 Action forbidden when the
overtime mix motor is not at home
position
0x01000401 Optical system setting out of 0x01005601 Mix mechanism busy
limit
0x01000402 DIFF bath temperature setting 0x01005602 Mix mechanism initialization
out of limit failed
0x01000601 Setting pressure failed 0x01005603 Mix mechanism action
overtime
0x01000602 Setting vacuum setting failed 0x01005604 Mix time setting out of limit
0x01000603 Adjusting pressure chamber 0x01005605 Mix mechanism initialization
pressure failed failed
0x01000604 Adjusting vacuum chamber 0x01005606 Mix mechanism current
vacuum failed action forbidden
0x01000605 Pressure test failed 0x01005700 Feeding motor busy
0x01000606 Vacuum test failed 0x01005701 Feeding motor initial position
photocoupler error
0x01000607 Pressure chamber pressure 0x01005702 Feeding position tube rack
out of control limit error
0x01000608 Vacuum chamber vacuum out 0x01005703 Feeding motor end position
of control limit photocoupler error
0x01000611 Flow cell clog 0x01005704 Feeding motor photocoupler
error
0x01000701 Driver board FPGA download 0x01005705 Feeding motor loading error
symbol error
0x01000702 Driver board FPGA download 0x01005706 Feeding motor action
command error overtime
0x01000703 Driver board FPGA load 0x01005708 Feeding position switch error
address out of range
0x01000704 Drive board single data written 0x01005801 Autoloader board functional
out of limit code error
0x01000705 Drive board data write out of 0x01005802 Autoloader board data length
limit error
0x01000706 Drive board write forbidden 0x01005803 Autoloader board command
label error
0x01000707 Drive board FPGA write 0x01005804 Autoloader board check code
8-6
Troubleshooting
overtime error
0x01000731 Drive board EEPROM write 0x01005805 Autoloader board end code
error error
0x01000801 Drive board functional code 0x01005806 Autoloader board identity
error code error
0x01000802 Drive board data length error 0x01005820 Autoloader board FPGA
download symbol error
0x01000803 Drive board command label 0x01005821 Autoloader board FPGA
error download command error
0x01000804 Drive board check code error 0x01005822 Autoloader board FPGA load
address out of range
0x01000805 Drive board end code error 0x01005823 Autoloader board single data
write out of limit
0x01000806 Drive board identity code error 0x01005824 Autoloader board data write
out of limit
0x01000807 Sequence pack analysis busy 0x01005825 Autoloader board write
forbidden
0x01000808 No complete sequence pack 0x01005826 Autoloader board write
overtime
0x01000809 Sequence pack head frame 0x01005900 Loading motor receive
error command error
0x01000810 Sequence pack start analysis 0x01005901 Loading motor initialization
number error forbidden
0x01000811 Sequence pack total frames 0x01005902 Unloading tray full, unloading
error forbidden
0x01000812 Sequence pack save error 0x01005903 Loading motor initial position
photocoupler error
0x01000813 Sequence pack end frame 0x01005904 Loading motor unloading
error position photocoupler error
0x01000814 Sequence pack body frame 0x01005905 Unloading position right
error photocoupler error
0x01000815 Sequence pack frame order 0x01005906 Unloading position left
error photocoupler error
0x01000816 Sequence pack execution 0x01005907 Loading motor not initialized
overtime
0x01000817 None-sequence pack analysis 0x01005908 Loading motor feeding not at
error initial position
0x01002000 Background abnormal 0x01005909 Loading motor unloading not
at initial position
8-7
Troubleshooting
0x01002010 WBC count starts too slow 0x0100590A Loading motor action
overtime
0x01002011 WBC count time too long 0x0100590B Autoloader receive command
error(not in sampling mode)
0x01002020 WBC count starts too fast 0x0100590C Autoloader receive command
error(not in stop status)
0x01002021 WBC count time too short 0x0100590D Autoloader horizontal loading
photocoupler match error
0x01002022 WBC bubbles 0x0100590E Autoloader unloading tubes
out of limit when initialization
0x01002030 RBC count starts slow 0x0100590F Photocoupler blocked after
autoloader initialization
0x01002031 RBC count time too long 0x01005a00 Autoloader board EEPROM
chip error
0x01002040 RBC count starts too fast 0x01005a01 Opening sample
compartment door failed
0x01002041 RBC count time too short 0x01005a02 Autoloader action forbidden
when autoloader is paused
0x01002042 RBC bubbles 0x01005a03 Autoloader adjust forbidden
when autoloader is not at
adjusting status
0x01003000 Low vacuum 0x01005a04 Autoloader adjustment
parameter setting out of
range
0x01003001 High vacuum 0x01005a05 Scanner read error
0x01003010 Low pressure
8-8
Troubleshooting
8.2 Errors indicated by error messages

When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be
displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are
discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the
lowest.
Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You
can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error,
or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.
8.2.1 Pressure errors
Table 8-2 Pressure errors

Error Message Description Possible causes
Setting pressure failed The pressure created in Pressure pump abnormal
the specified time can Tubing connects the pressure chamber
not meet the or pressure pump leaks
requirement. Pressure filter leaks
Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal
Setting vacuum setting The vacuum created in Vacuum pump abnormal
failed the specified time can Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or
not meet the vacuum pump leaks
requirement. Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal
8.2.2 Reagent errors

Table 8-3 Reagent errors
No Diluent Diluent is used up or the The Diluent is used up.

sensor of the diluent The sensor of the diluent pick up tube is
pick up tube is connected improperly or damaged and
connected improperly. needs to be replaced.
No LH lyse LH lyse is used up or The LH lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist LH lyse channel leaks, leading to
in the LH lyse channel excessive bubbles.
8-9
Troubleshooting
No LEO(I) lyse LEO(I) lyse is used up or The LEO(I) lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to
in the LEO(I) lyse excessive bubbles.
channel
No LEO(II) lyse LEO(II) lyse is used up The LEO(II) lyse is used up.
or excessive bubbles LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to
exist in the LEO(II) lyse excessive bubbles.
channel
No Cleanser Cleanser is used up or The cleanser is used up.
excessive bubbles exist Cleanser channel leaks, leading to
in the Cleanser channel excessive bubbles.
Waste is full The waste container is Waste container is full.
full or the sensor The sensor of the waste pick up tube is
connecting the waste connected improperly or damaged and
container is connected needs to be replaced.
improperly
Diluent expired Diluent expired
Diluent expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
LEO(I) lyse expired LEO(I) Lyse expired
LEO(I) Lyse Expired
LEO(II) lyse expired LEO(II) Lyse expired
LEO(II) Lyse expired
LH lyse expired LH Lyse expired
LH Lyse expired
Cleanser expired Cleanser expired
Cleanser expired
8.2.3 Hardware errors

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.
8.2.4 Measurement errors

Table 8-4 Measurement errors
Background One or more background 1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or
abnormal results are out of the aperture are contaminated.
specified range 2. Diluent is expired or contaminated
3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing
leak, leading to excessive bubbles
8-10
Troubleshooting
4. Bubbles or clog is alarmed during the

background count.
5. Outside interference caused by poor
shielding
LAS background Value is out of the range 1. LAS voltage signal is improperly
voltage abnormal of 0-400mv inducted.
2. Flow cell is contaminated.
3. Related detecting circuit abnormal
HGB background HGB background voltage 1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath;
voltage abnormal is out of the range HGB light is not turned on.
[3.2,4.9]V 2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated.
3. Reagent is expired or contaminated.
4. Improper HGB gain settings
5. HGB light assembly abnormal
6. Related detecting circuit abnormal
RBC clog RBC count time too long 1. Improper settings for reference count
RBC starts too slow time and start time.
2. The bath is contaminated or the
aperture is clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
6. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.
RBC bubbles RBC count time too short 1. Improper settings for reference count
RBC starts too fast time and start time.
tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
WBC clog WBC count time too long 1. Improper settings for reference count
WBC starts too slow time and start time.
2. The bath is contaminated or the
8-11
Troubleshooting
aperture is clogged by impurity.

tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
WBC bubbles WBC count time too short 1. Improper settings for reference count
WBC starts too fast time and start time.
tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
8.2.5 Temperature errors

Table 8-5 Temperature errors
Optical system temp. Temperature value read The temperature transducer inner the
error is out of the range of [30, optical system error
40] . The heater inner the optical system error
DIFF reaction bath Reaction bath abnormal The bath temperature is out of the
temp. error or reaction bath reference range of 35-37. Please
temperature transducer adjust the temperature to meet the
error requirement.
The temperature transducer of reaction
bath is damaged and needs to be
replaced.
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature The ambient temperature is out of the
out of working range abnormal or ambient working range of 15-30. Please
error requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
8-12
Troubleshooting
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature The ambient temperature is out of the

out of operating range abnormal or ambient operating range of 10-40. Please
error requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
8.2.6 Scattergram errors
Table 8-6 Scattergram errors

Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential

reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be
Fuzzy division between
1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
Fuzzy division MON and NEU occur on
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
between MON and normal samples, which
Flow cell is dirty.
NEU leads to abnormal or no
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
MON differential result.
normal range. The reaction is not
thoroughly processed.
RBCs are not thoroughly hemolyzed.
For normal samples, the
Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential
DIFF scattergram
reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be
differentiates but fuzzy
1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
LYM too high division occur between
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
LYM and Ghost, which
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
leads to abnormal or no
normal range. The reaction is not
LYM differential result.
thoroughly processed.
Sheath flow is not formed. Excessive
Spots obtained from
bubbles enter the WBC channel. Check
Spots scatter all over normal patient samples
whether the diluent container is empty to
the scattergram are randomly scattered
make sure if something is wrong with the
all over the scattergram.
diluent sensor.
Calculate the gain of the analyzer
For normal patient according to the standard scattergram. If
samples, the the newly set gain is normal and the
Compressed
scattergrams obtained is scattergram differentiates properly
scattergram
compressed either without the compressed problem, then no
evenly or to one side. further adjustment is necessary.
If the gain setup cannot solve the
8-13
Troubleshooting
problem, refer to the optical system

section in the service manual to remove
the error.
8-14
9 Appendixes
A. Accessories
A.1 Spare parts and assemblies

No. Code/Model Name
1 3001-30-68501 Data Board
2 3101-30-68503 Drive Board
3 3101-30-68505 Mother Board
4 3101-30-68507 Liquid Detection Board
5 3101-30-68509 Power Supply Board
6 3101-30-68511 Volumetric Board
7 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board
8 3101-30-68515 FS Pre-amplify Board
9 3101-30-68517 SS Pre-Amplify Board
10 3101-30-68519 Indicator Board
11 3102-30-69199 Autoloader board
12 0033-30-74615 10ml syringe
13 3100-10-49438 100ul syringe
14 3101-10-69301 250ul syringe
15 M90-100032--- 2.5ml syringe
16 3003-20-34942 2-way valve(Asco)
17 3003-20-34941 3-way valve(Asco)
18 3101-30-68611 Release Valve Assembly
19 M07-00014S-00 Pinch Valve Assembly
20 3101-30-68351 Waste Pump Assembly
21 3001-10-07252 Waste Pump
22 530B-10-05275 Pressure Pump
23 3001-10-07057 Volumetric Tube
24 3100-30-40745 tube rack assembly
25 3101-30-68320 Diff Bath Assembly
26 3102-30-69230 HGB assembly
27 3102-30-69253 WBC bath assembly
A-1
Appendixes
28 3102-30-69223 RBC bath assembly

29 3003-20-53969 RBC Ruby (D70nm)
30 3003-20-53970 WBC Ruby (D100nm)
31 3102-20-69171 Sampling probe
32 3101-30-68756 Diluent Cap Assembly
33 3101-30-68765 LEO (I) Lyse Cap Assembly
34 3101-30-68766 LEO (II) Lyse Cap Assembly
35 3101-30-68767 LH Lyse Cap Assembly
36 3101-30-68768 Cleanser Cap Assembly
37 3101-30-68776 Waste Cap Assembly
38 3006-20-74804 Probe Wipe
39 3003-20-34949 Isolation Chamber
40 3102-20-69165 Pressure Chamber
41 3101-30-68547 Vacuum Chamber
42 3001-10-07054 Air filter
43 2800-21-28878 Syringe Motor Position Sensor Assembly
44 3003-21-34925 Sampling Motor Position Sensor Assembly
45 0030-10-13064 Syringe Motor (100ul 250ul 2.5ml 10ml)
46 BA30-10-15115 Sampling motor
47 0000-10-11272 motor 2.33V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly
48 0000-10-11271 motor 2.1V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly
49 3102-30-69231 autoloader assembly
50 3101-30-68651 Optical System Assembly
51 3100-30-49556 Front Laser Assembly
52 3100-30-49559 Back Laser Assembly
53 3100-30-49560 Splitter Assembly
54 3101-30-68662 Las Stop Assembly
55 3101-30-68663 Mas Stop Assembly
56 3101-30-68664 Las PD Assembly
57 3101-30-68665 Mas PD Assembly
58 3100-30-49568 Flow Cell Assembly
59 3100-10-49436 7um particle (15ml)
60 M90-100031--- Tubing, PTFE, 0.066"X0.098"
61 M90-000026--- Tubing, PTFE,1/32"X1/16", 3000074
62 M90-000025--- Tubing, 1/8"X1/4",R-3603AAC02007, Tygon
A-2
Appendixes
63 M6G-020011--- Tubing, PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID

64 M6G-020009--- Tubing, 0.031"ID0.156"OD
65 M6G-020007--- Tubing, OD3mm ID1mm EVA
66 M6G-020006--- Tubing, Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350
67 A21-000007--- Tubing, Silicone,3/32"X7/32"2800392-100
68 3001-10-07069 Tubing,1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
69 0040-10-32301 Tubing,PTFE,.040"ID+/-.002"X.066"OD+/-.002
70 3101-20-68590 Fan of Power Supply Assembly
71 3101-20-68572 Fan of Main Unit
72 M07-00097S--- Switch
73 3001-10-07060 Aspirate key
A.2 Spare pipes

No. Code/Model Name
1 0040-10-32301 Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00
2 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
3 A21-000002--- Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100
4 M6G-020006--- Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1
5 M6G-020007--- Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA
6 M6G-020009--- Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID
7 M90-000025--- Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603
A.3 Spare PCBA

No. Code/Model Name
1 051-000014-00 Data board (including rootfs)
2 3101-30-68503 Drive board
3 3101-30-68505 Mother board
4 3101-30-68507 Liquid-level board
5 3101-30-68509 Power board
6 3101-30-68511 Volumetric board
7 3101-30-68513 Laser control board
8 3101-30-68515 FS pre-amplification board
9 3101-30-68517 SS pre-amplification board
10 3101-30-68519 Indicator board
11 3102-30-69197 Key board
12 3102-30-69199 Autoloading board
A-3
Appendixes
A.4 Spare cables

No. Code/Model Name
Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the
1 3100-20-49018 computer)
2 3100-20-49040 Connecting cable of Micro-switch
3 3101-20-68574 Connecting cable of reagent sensor
4 3101-20-68575 Connecting cable of volumetric board
5 3101-20-68578 Connecting cable of power switch
6 3101-20-68581 Connecting cable of laser control
7 3101-20-68584 SS signal line
8 3101-20-68585 FS signal line
9 3101-20-68589 Connecting cable from switch to power board
10 3101-20-68590 Power box fan and connecting cable
11 3101-20-68591 Outlet earth wire
12 3101-20-68592 Connecting cable of pump
13 3101-21-68588 Connecting cable of AC input
14 3101-21-68593 Connecting cable of laser
15 3102-20-69101 Power cord of the autoloading unit
16 3102-20-69102 Connecting cable of autoloader control
17 3102-20-69104 Wiring harness of the mixing motors
18 3102-20-69105 Connecting cable of DIFF bath
19 3102-20-69106 Connecting cable of the indicator board
20 3102-20-69107 Connecting cable of the switch control
21 3102-20-69108 Connecting cable of the autoloading motors and sensors
22 3102-20-69103 of the autoloading motors and sensors
A.5 Spare connectors

No. Code/Model Name
1 3001-10-07066 Tee connector T220/230-1
2 3102-20-69219 Waste tube connector
3 M90-100009--- Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange
4 M90-100010--- Nylon
5 M90-100012--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon
6 M90-100013--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon
7 M90-100015--- Lock Nut
8 M90-100016--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or
9 M90-100017--- LC23,Orange
10 M90-100019--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White
11 M90-100020--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black
A-4
Appendixes
12 M90-100021--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red

13 M90-100022--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green
14 M90-100023--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue
15 M90-100024--- Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1
16 M90-100025--- Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1
17 M90-100028--- Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
18 M90-100028-01 Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White
19 M90-100028-03 Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
20 M90-100030--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon
21 M90-100046--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange
22 M90-100048--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White
23 M90-100049--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black
24 M90-100051--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green
25 M90-100052--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue
26 M90-100065--- Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
27 M90-100069--- Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID
A.6 Consumables
No. Name Code/Model Package
Specifications
M-53LEO(I)
1 A11-000105--- 4LX1
Lyse(Chinese/4L)
M-53LEO(I)
2 A11-000113--- 1LX4
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
3 A11-000128--- 1LX4
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
4 A11-000129--- 4LX1
Lyse(English/4L)
M-53LEO(II)
5 A11-000114--- 200mLX4
Lyse(Chinese/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
6 A11-000115--- 400mLX4
M-53LEO(II)
7 A11-000130--- 200mLX4
Lyse(English/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
8 A11-000131--- 400mLX4
M-53LH
9 A11-000116--- 500mLX4
A-5
Appendixes
M-53LH
10 A11-000117--- 1LX4
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LH
11 A11-000132--- 500mLX4
M-53LH
12 A11-000133--- 1LX4
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53
13 A11-000118--- 1LX4
Cleanser(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53
14 A11-000134--- 1LX4
Cleanser(English/1LX4)
M-53D
15 A12-000140--- 20LX1
Diluent(domestic/20L)
M-53D
16 A12-000167--- 20LX1
Diluent(export/20L)
17 M-50P Probe Cleanser
A12-000151---
domestic/50mL 50mLX1
18 M-50P Probe Cleanser
A12-000178---
export/50mL 50mLX1
A-6
B. List of Wearing Parts
No. Code/Model Name

1 3001-10-07054 Air Filter
2 3003-20-34941 Tee valve ASCO458284
3 3003-20-34942 Two-way valve ASCO458283
4 3006-20-74804 Probe Wipe
5 M07-00014S-00 VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC
6 M07-00076F--- FUSE Slow-Blow
7 M07-00077F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A
8 M07-00079F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A
9 M08-000789--- PHOTOELEC switch
10 M6G-020011--- Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/
B-1
C. Fluidic diagram
C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table
D1. Valve Function Table

Two
No. Function
way/Tee
Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging
V01 3
path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe.
Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging
V02 3
path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe.
V03 Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe 3
Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe
V04 2
connects the sheath fluid syringe.
V05 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse 3
V06 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse 3
V07 Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse 3
Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of
V08 3
the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the
V09 2
DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath
Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the
V10 2
pressure chamber
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
V11 2
the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
V12 2
the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath
Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back
V13 2
bath
V14 Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath 2
V15 Controls the aspiration of the cleanser 3

Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispensation
V21 2
syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF
V22 2
bath
V23 Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe 3
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses
V24 2
sheath fluid
V25 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 2
D-1
Appendixes
V26 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 2

V27 Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe 2
V28 Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell 2
V29 Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath 3
V30 Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath 3
V31 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 3
V32 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 3
V33 Controls the WBC counting 2
V34 Controls the RBC counting 2
V35 Controls the draining of the RBC bath 2
V36 Controls the draining of the WBC bath 2
V37 Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber 2
V38 Controls the draining of the DIFF bath 2
V39 Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample 2
D2. Pump function table

Name Function
Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash
P1
the aperture
Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the
P2 vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back
bath and drain the volumetric tube.
P3 Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe
D3. Syringe function table

Name Function
Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample
Diluent syringe
probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe
Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the
Sheath syringe
sample preparation tubing
Aspiration Aspirates and dispenses samples
syringe
Sample syringe Dispenses the sample into the flow cell
Lyse-Syringe Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse
D-2
E. Tubing
E1. Components
E-1
F. Method to identify cross network cable and
direct-connected network cable
F.1. Identify cross network cable

1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
Connector of the network cable
2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B

End Awhite and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and
brown, and brown 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
F.2. Identify direct-connected network cable

1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
F-1
Appendixes
Connector of the direct-connected network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable

End Awhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
F-2
P/N: 046-000142-00(V1.0)

BC 5380 Service Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

BC 5380 Service Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)

, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

This warranty shall not extend to:

any product of any other manufacturer.

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,

Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

2 System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1

3 Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1

4 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.3 Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1

5.7 Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140

7 Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1

8 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1

9 Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1

z Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:

Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices

Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology

Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope

Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology

1.3 How to Find Information

If you want to See

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

You will find the following symbols in this manual:

When you see Then

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

When you see It means

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)

USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE

SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS

z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

z Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

z Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached

z Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

z Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

z Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

z For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

z To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

z Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

z Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

z All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.

z Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.

Software operating environment